1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Note Note
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
497 Code box prevent that the term
498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
507 More about \SpecialChar TeX
508 Code is described in section
513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
515 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
519 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 is explained in section
525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
527 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
547 See section 5.1 of the
551 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 \begin_layout Chapter
556 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
560 \begin_layout Section
561 Basic File Operations
562 \begin_inset Index idx
565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
574 \begin_layout Standard
579 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
580 in addition to some more advanced operations:
583 \begin_layout Itemize
605 \begin_layout Itemize
621 arg "buffer-new-template"
627 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 arg "buffer-write-as"
713 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
743 a few minor differences.
746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
757 command lists the available templates.
758 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
759 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
760 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
768 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
775 \begin_layout Standard
776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
809 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
810 is just that — a big, blank space.
818 \begin_layout Standard
839 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
844 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
847 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
865 will reload the document from disk.
866 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
867 and want to restore it to the last save.
876 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
877 them as your changes.
880 \begin_layout Section
881 Basic Editing Features
882 \begin_inset Index idx
885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
894 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
903 can perform cut and paste operations
904 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
905 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
906 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
907 editing features and how to access
909 We will start with cut and paste.
912 \begin_layout Standard
913 As you might expect, the
917 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
918 various other editing features.
919 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
923 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_inset Index idx
932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
961 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_inset Index idx
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1033 \begin_layout Itemize
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1043 \begin_layout Itemize
1047 \begin_inset space ~
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset Index idx
1070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 \begin_inset Index idx
1082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1107 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1113 \begin_layout Standard
1114 The first three are self-explanatory.
1115 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1116 and other programs by
1137 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1138 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1143 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1144 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1145 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1146 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1147 into individual cells.
1151 \begin_inset space ~
1156 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1157 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1161 \begin_layout Standard
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1170 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1172 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1188 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1189 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1195 \begin_inset space \space{}
1198 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1199 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1205 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1224 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1225 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1227 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1236 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1237 start a new paragraph.
1238 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1239 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1247 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 paste from the primary selection.
1268 This is normally the currently selected text.
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1298 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1304 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1321 button to skip the current word.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1341 If the toggle is set, searching for
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 will not match the word
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 Match whole words only
1370 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1371 to only find complete words, e.
1372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 offers also an advanced
1404 \begin_inset space ~
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1413 feature that is described in sec.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1420 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1427 \begin_layout Standard
1428 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1429 \begin_inset space \space{}
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1441 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1443 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1448 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1455 \begin_layout Standard
1459 arg "inset-select-all"
1462 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1463 When the cursor is inside an inset
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 selects the content of the inset.
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1481 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1484 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1488 \begin_layout Section
1490 \begin_inset Index idx
1493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1500 \begin_inset Index idx
1503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1512 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1519 \begin_layout Standard
1520 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1522 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1528 or the toolbar button
1534 to undo some mistake.
1535 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1540 or the toolbar button
1547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1554 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1558 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1561 \begin_layout Standard
1562 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1572 This is a consequence of the 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 step undo limit mentioned above.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1588 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1590 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1594 \begin_layout Section
1596 \begin_inset Index idx
1599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1608 \begin_layout Standard
1609 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1612 \begin_layout Enumerate
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 once anywhere in the edit window.
1623 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1632 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1645 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1660 \begin_layout Enumerate
1661 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1665 \begin_layout Standard
1666 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1667 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1671 \begin_layout Section
1673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1675 name "sec:Navigating"
1680 \begin_inset Index idx
1683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1694 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1697 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1703 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1707 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1709 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1716 or by the toolbar button
1719 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1725 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1728 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1731 and use the same menu to return to them.
1732 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1739 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1744 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1745 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 \begin_inset space ~
1752 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1753 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1754 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1755 your last editing position.
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1763 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1767 \begin_layout Subsection
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1771 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1778 \begin_layout Standard
1779 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1780 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1781 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1793 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1800 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1805 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1810 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1811 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1812 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1813 dialog and to modify the citation.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1819 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1820 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1828 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1833 you further to control the display.
1838 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1839 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1845 option keeps it in the current view state.
1846 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 3, the subsections of sections
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1863 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1878 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1888 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1889 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1903 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1904 So, for example, you can move section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 2.4 or after section
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1918 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1931 (or the corresponding key bindings
1939 ) you can change the level of sections.
1940 So you can for example make section
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \begin_layout Section
1956 Input/Word Completion
1957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1959 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1974 \begin_inset Index idx
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2010 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2012 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2013 is used to propose completions.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2017 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2025 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2041 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2050 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2051 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2061 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2062 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2063 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2064 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2069 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2070 completions available.
2075 key to accept a proposed completion.
2076 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2077 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2078 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2086 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2087 ing options for text.
2088 The special math option
2092 enables characters to be composed.
2093 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2094 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2097 , you can then input the characters
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2109 to a formula to get it.
2110 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2111 of the math toolbar.
2112 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2116 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2117 's installation folder.
2118 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2127 \begin_layout Section
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Index idx
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2205 \begin_layout Standard
2206 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2220 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2223 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2227 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2234 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2274 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2278 \begin_layout Labeling
2279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2283 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2284 LatexCommand nomenclature
2286 description "Tabulator key"
2292 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2294 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2301 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2312 , especially section
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "subsec:Lists"
2325 If you are still confused, look in the
2330 \begin_inset Newline newline
2338 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2339 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2343 \begin_layout Labeling
2344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2348 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2349 LatexCommand nomenclature
2351 description "Escape key"
2358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2365 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2366 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2369 \begin_layout Labeling
2370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2376 \begin_inset space ~
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2387 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2388 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2392 \begin_layout Standard
2393 There are three modifier keys:
2396 \begin_layout Labeling
2397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2416 LatexCommand nomenclature
2418 description "Control key"
2422 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2423 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2427 \begin_layout Itemize
2436 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2439 \begin_layout Itemize
2448 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2451 \begin_layout Itemize
2460 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2464 \begin_layout Labeling
2465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2484 LatexCommand nomenclature
2486 description "Shift key"
2490 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2491 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2494 \begin_layout Labeling
2495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2513 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2514 LatexCommand nomenclature
2516 description "Alt or Meta key"
2520 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2521 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2522 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2528 \begin_inset Newline newline
2531 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2533 menu accelerator keys
2536 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2537 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For example, the sequence
2543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset space ~
2592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2607 manual lists all other things bound to the
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2618 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2619 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2620 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2621 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2622 The \SpecialChar LyX
2623 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2624 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2625 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2627 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 followed by a capital
2650 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Section
2668 \begin_inset Index idx
2671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2684 \begin_layout Standard
2685 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2686 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2687 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2688 numbering schemes, and so on.
2689 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2690 and format the title of your document differently.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2698 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2699 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2700 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2701 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2702 picks one for you by default.
2703 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2706 \begin_layout Subsection
2708 \begin_inset Index idx
2711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2720 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 You can select a class using the
2730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2735 \begin_inset Index idx
2738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2759 \begin_layout Description
2760 Article for basic articles
2763 \begin_layout Description
2764 Report for basic reports
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Book for writing a book
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 Letter for US-style letters
2775 \begin_layout Standard
2776 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2777 only uses if you have installed
2778 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2780 distributions will include
2782 Here are some of the classes.
2783 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2785 Special Document Classes
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2810 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2811 There are three article layouts available.
2812 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2813 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2814 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2815 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2820 sequential numbering
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2824 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2825 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2826 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2827 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Beamer Layout for presentations
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2836 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2837 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2838 with \SpecialChar LyX
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2846 \begin_layout Description
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2851 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2858 \begin_layout Description
2859 Foils Used to make transparencies
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2864 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2865 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2866 with \SpecialChar LyX
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2872 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2875 \begin_layout Description
2876 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2885 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2886 (Is used by this document.)
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2897 \begin_layout Description
2902 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2903 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2905 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2909 \begin_layout Description
2910 Slides Used to make transparencies
2913 \begin_layout Description
2915 \begin_inset space ~
2918 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2919 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2922 \begin_layout Description
2923 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2926 \begin_layout Standard
2927 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2929 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2935 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2936 of the document classes.
2939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2949 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2969 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2970 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2972 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2975 \begin_layout Standard
2978 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2983 , are highly specialized.
2985 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2986 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2987 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2988 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2989 by some document class.
2990 There are just too many of them.
2991 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2994 \begin_layout Standard
2995 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3004 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3005 document class for a new file.
3007 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3012 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3021 manual for information on how to install them.
3022 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3028 \begin_layout Standard
3029 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3030 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3031 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3032 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3033 class files to be used for dissertation
3034 s submitted to those universities.
3035 The \SpecialChar LyX
3036 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3038 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3042 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3048 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3055 name "subsec:Modules"
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3074 chosen document class.
3075 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3076 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3087 \begin_inset Index idx
3090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3103 packages or file format converters that are not always
3104 installed by default.
3106 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3107 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3108 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3109 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3111 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3112 file without the missing prerequisites.
3113 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3114 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3121 \begin_inset Index idx
3124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3144 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3158 will advise you about these things.
3166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3170 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3175 \begin_inset Index idx
3178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3179 Document ! Local Layout
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3189 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3190 : They are intended to be used in
3191 a variety of different documents.
3192 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3193 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3194 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3195 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3196 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3216 manual for information on how to use it.
3219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Each class has a default set of options.
3225 Here's a quick table describing them:
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3237 \begin_inset Tabular
3238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3239 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 You're probably also wondering what
3707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3711 \begin_inset space ~
3715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3719 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3720 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3725 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3730 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3740 headings, there are also
3748 headings, and so on.
3749 We will describe these headings fully in section
3750 \begin_inset space ~
3754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3756 reference "subsec:Headings"
3763 \begin_layout Subsection
3765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3767 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3772 \begin_inset Index idx
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3782 \begin_inset Index idx
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 \begin_layout Standard
3795 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3812 \begin_inset space ~
3817 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3819 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3820 doesn't support special options you want to
3821 use for your document.
3822 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3823 -class and its options, you have to read
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3831 \begin_inset space ~
3838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3844 \begin_inset space ~
3849 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3850 You can choose between the following five options:
3853 \begin_layout Labeling
3854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3859 Use default page style of current class.
3862 \begin_layout Labeling
3863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3868 No page numbers or headings.
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3880 \begin_layout Labeling
3881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3886 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3887 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3888 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3889 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3892 \begin_layout Labeling
3893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3898 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3899 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 \begin_inset Index idx
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3910 -packages ! fancyhdr
3916 How they are defined is explained in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3930 \begin_layout Standard
3931 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3932 \begin_inset space ~
3936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3938 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3945 \begin_layout Subsection
3946 Paper Size and Orientation
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 Document ! Paper size
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3966 \begin_layout Standard
3967 You can find the following options in the menu
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3981 \begin_inset Index idx
3984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3993 \begin_layout Labeling
3994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4003 What size paper to print on.
4008 \begin_layout Itemize
4014 \begin_layout Itemize
4020 \begin_layout Itemize
4026 \begin_layout Itemize
4032 \begin_layout Itemize
4035 US letter, US legal, US executive
4038 \begin_layout Itemize
4044 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Labeling
4052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4057 To choose whether to output as
4068 \begin_layout Labeling
4069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 \begin_inset space ~
4078 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4079 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4082 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4086 name "subsec:Margins"
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 \begin_inset Index idx
4104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 Paper margins are set in the menu
4116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset Index idx
4123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4134 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4135 the paper format and the font size into account.
4138 \begin_layout Subsection
4142 \begin_layout Standard
4143 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4149 That includes the paragraph environments.
4150 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4151 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4152 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4154 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4163 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4165 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4166 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4167 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4170 \begin_layout Section
4171 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4172 \begin_inset Index idx
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 Paragraph ! Indentation
4184 \begin_layout Subsection
4186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4188 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4195 \begin_layout Standard
4196 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4197 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4200 \begin_layout Standard
4201 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4202 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4203 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4204 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4208 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4214 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4215 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4216 language than English.
4218 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4221 \begin_layout Standard
4222 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4223 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4224 into \SpecialChar LyX
4226 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4229 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4231 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4232 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4233 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4240 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4241 goes to produce a printable file.
4246 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4248 gives you the ability globally to change
4252 these pre-coded spacings.
4253 We will explain more later.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4257 Paragraph Separation
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Paragraph ! Separation
4277 \begin_layout Standard
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4293 \begin_inset space ~
4300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4316 \begin_layout Subsection
4320 \begin_layout Standard
4321 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4331 dialog and toggle the
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4339 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4342 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4346 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4347 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4352 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4353 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset Index idx
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4389 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4393 \begin_inset space ~
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 -packages ! setspace
4419 installed to use this feature.
4424 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4433 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4434 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4437 \begin_layout Section
4438 Paragraph Environments
4439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4441 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4446 \begin_inset Index idx
4449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 Paragraph ! Environments
4456 \begin_inset Index idx
4459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4460 Paragraph environments|(
4468 \begin_layout Subsection
4472 \begin_layout Standard
4473 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4495 \begin_inset Newline newline
4498 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4501 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4502 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4511 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 A paragraph environment is simply a
4516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4523 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4524 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4525 scheme, labels, and so on.
4526 Additionally, you can
4527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4534 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4535 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4536 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4537 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4539 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4541 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4546 \begin_inset Graphics
4547 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4553 at the left end of the toolbar.
4555 will change the environment of the
4559 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4560 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4561 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4565 \begin_layout Standard
4574 create a new paragraph using the
4578 paragraph environment.
4580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4587 because if you are in one of these environments:
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4634 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4638 , rather than resetting it to
4643 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4650 reference "sec:Nesting"
4657 \begin_layout Subsection
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 The default paragraph environment is
4667 It creates a plain paragraph.
4669 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4670 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4671 this manual) are in the
4678 \begin_layout Standard
4679 You can nest a paragraph using the
4683 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4691 \begin_layout Subsection
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4706 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4707 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4716 for thanks or contact information.
4717 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4718 places all of this on a separate page
4719 along with today's date.
4720 For other types of documents, the title
4721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4728 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4734 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4748 Here's how you use them:
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 Put the title of your document in the
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 Put the author name in the
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4769 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4775 Note that using this environment is optional.
4776 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4777 will automatically insert today's date.
4778 If you don't want a date, use the option
4780 Suppress default date on front page
4784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4795 \begin_layout Standard
4796 You can use footnotes to insert
4797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4804 or contact information.
4807 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_inset Index idx
4812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4821 name "subsec:Headings"
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4831 takes care of the numbering for you.
4834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Section headings ! Numbered
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Enumerate
4877 \begin_layout Enumerate
4883 \begin_layout Enumerate
4889 \begin_layout Enumerate
4895 \begin_layout Standard
4897 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4898 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4899 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4903 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4904 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4905 You group the book into chapters.
4907 does a similar grouping:
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 is divided into either
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4974 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4995 Not all document types use the
4999 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5004 is the top-level heading.
5012 \begin_layout Standard
5017 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5018 labels it with its number,
5019 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5021 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 The unnumbered section headings have a
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 at the end of their name.
5057 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5058 the table of contents, see section
5059 \begin_inset space ~
5063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5073 Changing the Numbering
5074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5076 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5085 in the Table of Contents.
5086 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5088 Just as certain classes start with
5102 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5112 This is something you can change.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5122 \begin_inset Index idx
5125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5134 \begin_inset space ~
5138 \begin_inset space ~
5143 you will see two counters.
5148 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5149 numbers a section heading.
5150 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5155 Short Titles of Headings
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Section headings ! Short titles
5166 \begin_inset Argument 1
5169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5178 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5185 \begin_layout Standard
5186 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5187 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5188 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5189 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5194 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5195 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5196 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5197 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5208 This will insert a box labeled
5209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5213 \begin_inset space ~
5217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5220 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5221 This also works for captions inside floats.
5222 There can only be one short title per title.
5225 \begin_layout Standard
5226 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 The following information applies to all section headings:
5237 \begin_layout Itemize
5238 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5245 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5249 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5253 \begin_layout Subsection
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5259 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5273 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5274 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5275 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5276 the text they contain.
5277 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5285 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5298 when you start a new paragraph.
5299 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5303 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5304 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5305 have to change back to the
5309 environment yourself.
5312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 \begin_inset Index idx
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5335 time for the differences.
5344 are identical except for one difference:
5348 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5357 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Here's an example of the
5374 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5376 See – no indentation!
5380 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5381 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5382 the other paragraph.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's another example, this time in the
5393 \begin_layout Quotation
5399 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5400 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5401 the first line, then
5405 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5409 you were quoting other text.
5412 \begin_layout Quotation
5413 Here's a new paragraph.
5414 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5415 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5419 As the examples show,
5423 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5424 They should put quotes in the
5429 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5433 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset Index idx
5451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5472 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5478 \begin_inset Newline newline
5481 Which I did not rehearse!
5485 It could be much worse.
5486 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5488 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5489 indented a bit more than the first.
5490 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5496 \begin_inset Newline newline
5499 And make things look fine
5500 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 arg "newline-insert newline"
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5517 does not indent both margins.
5518 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5519 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5522 arg "newline-insert newline"
5528 \begin_layout Subsection
5530 \begin_inset Index idx
5533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5551 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5561 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5562 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5571 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5572 lets you provide your own label.
5573 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5574 describing some general features of all four of them.
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5584 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5585 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5594 reset the environment to
5598 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5599 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5600 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5608 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5616 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5617 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5618 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5620 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5621 you read all of section
5622 \begin_inset space ~
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5628 reference "sec:Nesting"
5635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5657 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5661 paragraph environment.
5662 It has the following properties:
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5670 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The items can have any length.
5683 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5684 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 environment inside another
5700 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5708 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5721 reference "sec:Nesting"
5725 for a full explanation of nesting.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5739 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5744 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5748 The label for the first level
5752 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 The label for the second level is a dash.
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5771 \begin_layout Itemize
5772 Back out to the third level.
5776 \begin_layout Itemize
5777 Back to the second level.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 Back to the outermost level.
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 These are the default labels for an
5791 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5796 dialog in the submenu
5801 \begin_inset Index idx
5804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5810 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5814 \begin_layout Standard
5815 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5816 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5818 \begin_inset space ~
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5824 reference "sec:Nesting"
5831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5833 \begin_inset Index idx
5836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5845 name "sec:Enumerate"
5852 \begin_layout Standard
5857 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5858 It has these properties:
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5876 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 environment resets the counter to one.
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5899 Items can have any length.
5902 \begin_layout Enumerate
5903 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5924 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5926 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5927 labels the four different levels in an
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 The first level of an
5939 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5953 \begin_layout Enumerate
5954 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5964 Back to the third level
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 Back to the second level.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 Back to the outermost level.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5982 environment, see section
5983 \begin_inset space ~
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5989 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5994 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5998 \begin_layout Standard
5999 There is more to nesting
6003 environments than we've stated here.
6004 You should read section
6005 \begin_inset space ~
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6011 reference "sec:Nesting"
6015 to learn more about nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6020 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6037 list has no fixed label.
6038 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6047 of the first line as the label.
6051 \begin_layout Description
6052 Example: This is an example of the
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6061 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6074 it is meant that the first usage of the
6078 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6080 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6088 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6102 \begin_inset space ~
6106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6108 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6112 for more information.) Here is an example:
6115 \begin_layout Description
6117 \begin_inset space ~
6120 Example: This one shows how to use a
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_layout Description
6136 Usage: You should use the
6140 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6141 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6143 It's not a good idea to use a
6147 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6148 You're better off using
6160 paragraphs into them.
6163 \begin_layout Description
6164 Nesting: You can nest
6168 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6174 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6175 them from the first line.
6178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6197 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6198 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6211 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6213 Here are its properties:
6216 \begin_layout Labeling
6217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6222 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6231 of each line as the item label.
6236 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6237 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6238 space as described above.
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6243 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6244 uses different margins for the item label and the
6245 body of the item text.
6246 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6247 label width plus a little extra space.
6251 \begin_layout Labeling
6252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6254 \begin_inset space ~
6257 width \SpecialChar LyX
6258 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6259 If the label width is larger, the label
6260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 into the first line.
6268 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6269 margin of the rest of the item text.
6272 \begin_layout Labeling
6273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6275 \begin_inset space ~
6278 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6283 environment has the same left margin.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6297 dialog (toolbar button
6300 arg "layout-paragraph"
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6312 determines the default label width.
6313 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6322 multiple times instead.
6323 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6336 \begin_inset space ~
6341 every time you alter a label in a
6346 \begin_inset Newline newline
6349 The predefined default width is the length of
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_layout Standard
6369 list the same way as the
6373 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6379 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6388 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6389 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6391 \begin_inset space ~
6395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6397 reference "sec:Nesting"
6401 to learn about nesting.
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 There is yet another feature of the
6409 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 left-justifies the item labels by
6412 You can use additional
6416 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6417 justifies the item label.
6422 are documented in section
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6429 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6434 Here are some examples:
6437 \begin_layout Labeling
6438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6439 Left The default for
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6455 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6458 \begin_layout Labeling
6459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6474 \begin_layout Subsection
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6478 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6483 \begin_inset Index idx
6486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6495 \begin_layout Standard
6496 The features described in this section require that the module
6498 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6500 is loaded in the document settings.
6501 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6512 -packages ! enumitem
6520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6521 Custom Enumerate Lists
6522 \begin_inset Index idx
6525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6526 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6536 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6542 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6543 There you add the command
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6568 Code, look at section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6588 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6595 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6596 For capital Roman numerals replace
6608 in the command above.
6609 For Arabic numerals use
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6641 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 You can only number 26
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6653 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6663 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6666 \begin_layout Standard
6667 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 \begin_inset Argument 1
6674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_inset Argument 1
6704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6727 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_layout Enumerate
6733 \begin_inset Argument 1
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 \begin_inset Argument 1
6764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6791 For this list these commands were used:
6794 \begin_layout Standard
6805 \begin_inset Newline newline
6813 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 \begin_inset Newline newline
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6838 makes the label emphasized and
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6857 lists until you change the definition.
6865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6867 \begin_inset Index idx
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_inset Note Note
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 goes back to default numbering
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Standard
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6930 \begin_layout Standard
6931 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6936 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6937 to indicate that it is a resumed
6938 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6939 , but in the output.
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6951 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6963 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6964 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6965 of a normal enumeration.
6966 There, insert the command
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6980 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6996 \begin_layout Enumerate
6997 \begin_inset Argument 1
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 This enumeration starts at 4
7019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7021 \begin_inset Index idx
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7036 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7039 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 \begin_layout Itemize
7044 with standard spacing
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7050 Add there the command
7054 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Itemize
7084 \begin_layout Itemize
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7096 \begin_inset Index idx
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 -packages ! enumitem
7107 For more information see its documentation,
7108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7120 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7121 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7125 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7129 \begin_inset Argument 1
7132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7140 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 with negative indentation
7157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7158 Further Customization
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 Lists ! Customization
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 You can also change the style of description lists.
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 changes the description label font, the command
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 sets the list style.
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 An example where the command
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7205 itshape, style=nextline
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7212 \begin_layout Description
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7218 \begin_inset Argument 1
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7229 itshape, style=nextline
7239 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7240 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7244 \begin_layout Description
7246 \begin_inset space ~
7249 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7250 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7251 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7261 \begin_inset Index idx
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 -packages ! enumitem
7272 For more information see its documentation
7273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7282 \begin_layout Subsection
7284 \begin_inset Index idx
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7298 \begin_inset space ~
7301 Address: An Overview
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7306 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7321 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7322 gags on the document.
7323 In contrast, you can use the
7330 \begin_inset space ~
7335 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7336 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 Of course, you're not limited to using
7348 \begin_inset space ~
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7362 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7363 some European academic papers.
7366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7370 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7382 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7383 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7392 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7393 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7394 Here's an example of each:
7397 \begin_layout Right Address
7399 \begin_inset Newline newline
7403 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 When is it? What is today?
7413 \begin_layout Standard
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7423 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7425 the largest block of text on a single line.
7426 Here's an example of the
7433 \begin_layout Address
7435 \begin_inset Newline newline
7438 Where do I send this
7439 \begin_inset Newline newline
7442 Your post office and country
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7446 As you can see, both
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7463 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7464 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7470 This makes sense, since
7478 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7479 Thus, you have to use
7486 arg "newline-insert newline"
7491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7494 \begin_inset space ~
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 ) to start a new line in an
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7518 \begin_layout Subsection
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7524 or list of references.
7526 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7531 \begin_inset Index idx
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Standard
7548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7549 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7550 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7551 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7565 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7566 The book document classes ignores the
7570 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7574 in a letter document class.
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7582 environment does several things for you.
7583 First, it puts the centered label
7584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7592 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7594 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7595 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7596 the subsequent text.
7597 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7599 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7603 \begin_layout Standard
7604 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7608 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7609 The new paragraph will still be in the
7614 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7615 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 \begin_inset Float figure
7624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7626 \begin_inset Graphics
7627 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7640 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7661 \begin_layout Standard
7662 We would love to demonstrate the
7666 environment, but since this document is in the
7667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7674 class, we can't do this.
7675 We inserted it therefore as figure
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7687 If you have never heard of an
7688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7695 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7712 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used to list references.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the end of the document.
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7739 When you first open a
7743 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7744 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 depending on the document class.
7761 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7762 Each paragraph of the
7766 environment is a bibliography entry.
7771 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7772 Each new paragraph is still in the
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7781 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7783 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7785 handling, have a look at section
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7792 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7799 \begin_layout Subsection
7800 Special Environments
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7805 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7806 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7827 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7840 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7842 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7847 key as a fixed whitespace.
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7864 \begin_inset space ~
7869 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7887 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7890 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7893 arg "newline-insert newline"
7910 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7911 So, when you finish using the
7916 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7917 Also, you can nest the
7922 environment inside of others.
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7933 arg "newline-insert newline"
7936 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7941 \begin_inset space \space{}
7951 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 arg "newline-insert newline"
7971 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7977 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7979 You must put at least one
7983 in any line you want blank.
7984 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7988 \begin_layout Itemize
7989 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7993 since that will insert
7998 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8001 arg "self-insert \""
8007 \begin_layout Standard
8011 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8019 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8023 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8028 printf("Hello World!
8033 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8042 This is just the standard
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8060 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8062 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8063 as if you used a typewriter.
8064 \begin_inset Index idx
8067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8068 Paragraph environments|)
8073 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8076 Program Code Listings
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Standard
8110 environment is similar to the
8115 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8116 computer console text.
8121 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8135 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8136 you can have empty lines.
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 have a certain language and a text style
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8155 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8156 and \SpecialChar TeX
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 Because of these properties
8165 works like a typewriter.
8169 \begin_layout Verbatim
8174 \begin_layout Verbatim
8178 The following 2 lines are empty:
8181 \begin_layout Verbatim
8185 \begin_layout Verbatim
8189 \begin_layout Verbatim
8191 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8196 \begin_layout Standard
8201 environment is identical to
8205 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8206 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8213 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8218 \begin_layout Section
8219 Nesting Environments
8220 \begin_inset Index idx
8223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8224 Nesting ! Environments
8230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8239 \begin_layout Subsection
8243 \begin_layout Standard
8245 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8247 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8249 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8251 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8267 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Enumerate
8285 \begin_layout Standard
8286 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8287 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8295 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_inset space ~
8312 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8314 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8317 arg "depth-increment"
8323 arg "depth-decrement"
8337 arg "depth-increment"
8343 arg "depth-decrement"
8347 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8348 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8353 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8354 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8355 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8356 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8357 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8363 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8365 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8368 \begin_layout Subsection
8369 What You Can and Can't Nest
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8373 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8374 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8377 \begin_layout Standard
8378 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8379 than a simple yes or no.
8380 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Completely unnestable
8387 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8392 \begin_layout Itemize
8393 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8397 \begin_layout Standard
8398 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8399 environments have them:
8402 \begin_layout Description
8403 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8404 Can't nest into them.
8408 \begin_layout Itemize
8414 \begin_layout Itemize
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Itemize
8432 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_layout Description
8441 \begin_inset space ~
8444 Nestable You can nest them.
8445 You can nest other things into them.
8449 \begin_layout Itemize
8455 \begin_layout Itemize
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8479 \begin_layout Itemize
8485 \begin_layout Itemize
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8498 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Description
8512 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8513 You can't nest anything into them.
8517 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8529 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_inset space ~
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8612 \begin_layout Standard
8613 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8621 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8631 \begin_inset space ~
8634 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8635 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8636 nested section headings violate this.
8644 \begin_layout Subsection
8645 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8646 \begin_inset Index idx
8649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8658 \begin_layout Standard
8659 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8660 affected by nesting anyhow.
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8678 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8686 Figures and tables in
8690 are not affected by this.
8695 Have a look at section
8696 \begin_inset space ~
8700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8702 reference "sec:Floats"
8706 for more information about
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8715 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8716 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8729 of its own, it behaves just like a
8730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8737 paragraph environment.
8738 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8743 Here's an example with a table:
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8751 \begin_layout Enumerate
8752 This is (a) and it's nested.
8756 \begin_layout Standard
8757 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8765 \begin_inset Tabular
8766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8767 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8769 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8861 \begin_layout Enumerate
8863 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8867 \begin_layout Enumerate
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8875 \begin_layout Enumerate
8880 \begin_layout Enumerate
8881 This is (a) and it's nested.
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8894 \begin_inset Tabular
8895 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8896 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8897 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8898 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8996 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8999 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9008 \begin_layout Standard
9009 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9012 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 This is (a) and it's nested.
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 \begin_inset Tabular
9034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_layout Standard
9123 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9129 \begin_layout Enumerate
9131 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9138 \begin_layout Enumerate
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9149 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9150 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9154 \begin_layout Subsection
9155 Usage and General Features
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9160 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9169 is the innermost possible depth.
9170 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 level #1 – outermost
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9198 \begin_layout Itemize
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9208 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9209 both of them in the example.
9210 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9220 For example, if we tried to nest another
9225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9232 , we would get errors.
9235 \begin_layout Subsection
9237 \begin_inset Index idx
9240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 \begin_layout Standard
9250 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9251 We have several examples of nested environments.
9252 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9257 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9260 \begin_layout Labeling
9261 \labelwidthstring MMM
9262 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9271 \begin_layout Labeling
9272 \labelwidthstring MMM
9273 #2-a This is level #2.
9274 We created it by using
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-increment"
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9292 #3-a This is level #3.
9293 This time, we just enter
9300 arg "depth-increment"
9304 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9308 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9314 arg "depth-increment"
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9326 environment, nested inside of
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 So, it's at level #4.
9336 We did this by entering
9339 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9345 arg "depth-increment"
9348 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9353 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9369 \begin_layout Standard
9374 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9377 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9383 \begin_layout Labeling
9384 \labelwidthstring MMM
9385 #4-a This is level #4.
9389 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9392 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9397 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9401 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9406 keep nesting things inside
9407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9418 \begin_layout Labeling
9419 \labelwidthstring MMM
9420 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9428 and this is level #6.
9429 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #5-b Back to level #5.
9439 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9445 arg "depth-decrement"
9452 \begin_layout Labeling
9453 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9463 arg "depth-decrement"
9466 , we're back at level #4.
9470 \begin_layout Labeling
9471 \labelwidthstring MMM
9472 #3-b Back to level #3.
9473 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9477 \begin_layout Labeling
9478 \labelwidthstring MMM
9479 #2-b Back to level #2.
9484 \begin_layout Labeling
9485 \labelwidthstring MMM
9486 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9487 After this sentence, we will enter
9491 and change the paragraph environment back to
9498 \begin_layout Standard
9499 We could have also used the
9515 environment in place of the
9520 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9524 Example 2: Inheritance
9527 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9528 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9531 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9540 arg "depth-increment"
9544 \begin_inset Newline newline
9547 which, we will change to the
9555 \begin_layout Enumerate
9560 environment, at level #2.
9563 \begin_layout Enumerate
9564 Notice how the nested
9568 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9572 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9576 \begin_layout Standard
9577 We ended this example by entering
9582 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9586 and reset the nesting depth by using
9589 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9596 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9605 \begin_inset Argument 1
9608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9609 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9618 This is level #1, in an
9622 paragraph environment.
9623 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9627 \begin_layout Enumerate
9632 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9638 arg "depth-increment"
9642 Now, what happens if we nest an
9646 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9647 label be? An asterisk?
9651 \begin_layout Itemize
9661 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9662 So, its label is a bullet.
9663 (We got here by using
9666 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9672 arg "depth-increment"
9675 , then changing the environment to
9683 \begin_layout Itemize
9684 Here's level #4, produced using
9687 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9702 \begin_layout Enumerate
9705 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9710 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9714 , because we are in the
9722 environment (that is, it is an
9737 \begin_layout Enumerate
9742 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9743 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9748 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9751 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9754 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 to decrease the depth after the next
9767 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9774 \begin_layout Enumerate
9776 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9784 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9789 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9798 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9803 reset the counter for the label.
9807 \begin_layout Enumerate
9811 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9817 arg "depth-decrement"
9820 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9821 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9822 into the twofold-nested
9830 \begin_layout Enumerate
9831 The same thing happens if we do another
9834 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9840 arg "depth-decrement"
9843 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9846 \begin_layout Standard
9847 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9852 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9867 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9874 The same rule applies for the
9878 environment, as well.
9881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9882 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9885 \begin_layout Enumerate
9886 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9887 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9888 the same detail with how we did it.
9897 \begin_layout Standard
9905 arg "depth-increment"
9912 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9913 the example in parentheses someplace.
9914 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9915 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9916 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9930 Now we will add verse.
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9934 It will get much worse.
9935 \begin_inset Newline newline
9945 arg "depth-increment"
9956 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9957 \begin_inset Newline newline
9960 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9961 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9980 \begin_layout Standard
9981 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9987 \begin_layout Standard
9989 \begin_inset Tabular
9990 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9991 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9992 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9993 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10078 \begin_layout Verse
10082 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10092 arg "depth-increment"
10098 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10112 arg "depth-decrement"
10119 \begin_layout Enumerate
10124 : level #1) This is another item.
10125 Note that selecting a
10129 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10130 3 times to put the table inside the
10138 \begin_layout Quotation
10139 We're now ending the
10143 list and changing to
10148 We're still at level #1.
10149 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10150 The next set of paragraphs is a
10151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10158 We will nest both the
10165 \begin_inset space ~
10170 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10174 for the letter body.
10178 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10181 to preserve the depth.
10182 Remember that you need to use
10185 arg "newline-insert newline"
10188 to create multiple lines inside the
10195 \begin_inset space ~
10205 \begin_layout Right Address
10207 \begin_inset Newline newline
10210 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10211 \begin_inset Newline newline
10217 \begin_layout Address
10219 \begin_inset space ~
10225 \begin_layout Quotation
10226 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10230 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10231 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10232 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10233 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10234 as soon as possible.
10235 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10238 \begin_layout Quotation
10239 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10240 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10241 with your order, along with payment.
10244 \begin_layout Quotation
10245 We thank you again for your patience.
10248 \begin_layout Address
10250 \begin_inset Newline newline
10257 \begin_layout Quotation
10258 That ends that example!
10261 \begin_layout Standard
10262 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10263 gives you a lot of power with just
10265 We could have easily nested an
10286 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10289 \begin_layout Subsection
10291 \begin_inset Index idx
10294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10295 Nesting ! Separation
10301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10303 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10310 \begin_layout Standard
10311 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10313 For example you need two different enumerations:
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 \begin_layout Enumerate
10330 \begin_layout Standard
10331 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10337 \begin_layout Itemize
10343 \begin_layout Standard
10344 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10362 \begin_layout Standard
10363 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10364 list item and use the menu
10366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10367 Start New Environment
10370 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10372 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10375 arg "paragraph-break"
10379 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10380 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10381 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10382 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10389 arg "paragraph-break"
10392 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10395 \begin_layout Section
10396 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10397 \begin_inset Index idx
10400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10409 \begin_layout Standard
10410 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10411 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10413 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10414 be broken at the end of a line.
10415 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10419 \begin_layout Subsection
10421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10423 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10428 \begin_inset Index idx
10431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10442 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10443 ) not to break the line at
10445 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10448 \begin_layout Quote
10449 Further documentation is given in section
10450 \begin_inset Newline newline
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10456 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10464 \begin_layout Standard
10465 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10480 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10489 A protected space is set with
10491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10494 \begin_inset space ~
10502 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10508 \begin_layout Subsection
10510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10512 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10517 \begin_inset Index idx
10520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10521 Spacing ! Horizontal
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 The length units are listed in Appendix
10538 \begin_inset space ~
10542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10544 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10555 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10560 \begin_inset Index idx
10563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10564 Spaces ! Inter-word
10572 \begin_layout Standard
10573 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10574 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10575 at the ends of sentences.
10576 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10577 automatically takes care about this.
10578 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10579 followed by a period; see section
10580 \begin_inset space ~
10584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10586 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10591 To insert a normal space, select
10593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10596 \begin_inset space ~
10604 arg "space-insert normal"
10610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10614 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10619 \begin_inset Index idx
10622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10631 \begin_layout Standard
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10650 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10651 inside abbreviations:
10654 \begin_layout Quote
10656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10660 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10663 \begin_layout Standard
10664 or between values and units.
10665 Compare for example this:
10666 \begin_inset Newline newline
10670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10674 \begin_inset Newline newline
10677 10 kg (normal space
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10694 arg "space-insert thin"
10700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 You can also insert the following space types:
10708 \begin_layout Description
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10717 space A line with a
10718 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10722 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10726 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10729 negative thin space between the arrows.
10732 \begin_layout Description
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10741 space A line with a
10742 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10746 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10750 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10753 negative medium space between the arrows.
10756 \begin_layout Description
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset space ~
10765 space A line with a
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10770 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10774 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10777 negative thick space between the arrows.
10780 \begin_layout Description
10782 \begin_inset space ~
10786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10790 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10794 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10798 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10802 \begin_inset space ~
10806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10809 em) space between the arrows.
10812 \begin_layout Description
10814 \begin_inset space ~
10818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10826 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10830 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10834 \begin_inset space ~
10838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10841 em) space between the arrows.
10844 \begin_layout Description
10846 \begin_inset space ~
10850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10854 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10858 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10862 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10873 em) space between the arrows.
10876 \begin_layout Description
10878 \begin_inset space ~
10882 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10886 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10898 cm space between the arrows.
10901 \begin_layout Standard
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10909 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10913 lists the different space sizes.
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10917 \begin_inset Float table
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10928 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10932 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10942 \begin_inset Tabular
10943 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10944 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11221 \begin_inset Index idx
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_layout Standard
11234 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11235 feature for adding extra space
11236 in a uniform fashion.
11237 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11238 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11239 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11240 equally between themselves.
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11244 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11247 \begin_layout Quote
11249 This is on the left side
11250 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11253 This is on the right
11256 \begin_layout Quote
11259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11269 \begin_layout Quote
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11280 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11286 \begin_layout Standard
11287 That was an example in the
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11297 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11301 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11304 is one in a standard paragraph.
11305 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11309 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11313 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11316 \begin_inset space ~
11321 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11324 \begin_layout Standard
11326 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11330 \begin_inset space ~
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11338 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11342 \begin_inset space ~
11348 \begin_layout Standard
11350 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11354 \begin_inset space ~
11360 \begin_layout Standard
11362 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11374 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11386 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11396 \begin_layout Standard
11397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11405 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11409 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11411 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11412 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11416 option in the space dialog.
11424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11428 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11433 \begin_inset Index idx
11436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11447 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11450 \begin_layout Standard
11451 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11454 What is correct English?:
11455 \begin_inset Newline newline
11459 \begin_inset Newline newline
11463 \begin_inset space ~
11466 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11467 \begin_inset Newline newline
11471 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 \begin_inset Newline newline
11486 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11497 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11522 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11525 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11529 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11546 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11555 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11556 That is why it is named
11557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11565 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11566 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11570 \begin_layout Subsection
11572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11574 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11579 \begin_inset Index idx
11582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11591 \begin_layout Standard
11592 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11595 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11597 \begin_inset space ~
11603 There you find the following sizes:
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11619 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11620 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11625 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11628 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11630 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset Index idx
11639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 Document ! Settings
11645 for the paragraph separation.
11646 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11657 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset Index idx
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11673 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11678 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11679 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11688 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11697 s are described in section
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11704 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11713 If there are several
11717 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11718 You can therefore use
11722 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11730 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11731 \begin_inset space ~
11735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11737 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11744 \begin_layout Standard
11745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11755 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11756 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11768 \begin_layout Subsection
11769 Paragraph Alignment
11770 \begin_inset Index idx
11773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11774 Paragraph ! Alignment
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11788 dialog (toolbar button
11791 arg "layout-paragraph"
11795 There are five possibilities:
11798 \begin_layout Itemize
11806 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11812 \begin_layout Itemize
11820 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11826 \begin_layout Itemize
11834 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11840 \begin_layout Itemize
11848 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11854 \begin_layout Itemize
11862 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11868 \begin_layout Standard
11869 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11870 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11871 the left and right margins.
11872 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11877 This paragraph is right aligned,
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11882 this one is centered,
11885 \begin_layout Standard
11887 this one is left aligned.
11890 \begin_layout Subsection
11892 \begin_inset Index idx
11895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11896 Page breaks ! Forced
11902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11904 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11911 \begin_layout Standard
11912 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11913 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11914 force a page break where you want one.
11915 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11916 is good at page breaking.
11917 Only if you use a lot of
11921 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11922 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11926 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11927 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11931 have to change the page breaking.
11934 \begin_layout Standard
11935 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11937 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11940 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11942 \begin_inset space ~
11948 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11951 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 \begin_inset space ~
11958 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11960 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11961 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11964 \begin_layout Standard
11965 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11966 at the top of a page.
11967 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11969 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11970 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11971 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11975 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11979 to learn more about
11986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11990 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11995 \begin_inset Index idx
11998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11999 Page breaks ! Clear
12007 \begin_layout Standard
12008 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12009 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12010 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12011 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12012 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12016 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12019 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12021 \begin_inset space ~
12027 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12030 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12032 \begin_inset space ~
12036 \begin_inset space ~
12041 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12042 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12045 \begin_layout Subsection
12047 \begin_inset Index idx
12050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12059 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12066 \begin_layout Standard
12067 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12069 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12072 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12078 \begin_inset space ~
12086 arg "newline-insert newline"
12090 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12095 \begin_inset space ~
12099 \begin_inset space ~
12107 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12110 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12112 This is useful to avoid
12113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12120 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12124 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12125 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12127 very good at line breaking.
12128 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12129 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "sec:Quote"
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12143 reference "sec:Verse"
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12157 \begin_layout Subsection
12159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12161 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12166 \begin_inset Index idx
12169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 \begin_layout Standard
12180 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12203 you can insert horizontal lines.
12204 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12205 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12206 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12211 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12222 \begin_layout Section
12223 Characters and Symbols
12226 \begin_layout Standard
12227 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12228 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12229 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12237 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12241 for information on how this is done.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12250 dialog via the menu
12252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 \begin_layout Standard
12260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12268 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12269 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12271 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12279 \begin_layout Section
12280 Fonts and Text Styles
12281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12283 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12290 \begin_layout Subsection
12292 \begin_inset Index idx
12295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12304 \begin_layout Standard
12305 There are two types of fonts:
12308 \begin_layout Description
12310 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset Index idx
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12323 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12328 characters) in the font.
12329 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12330 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12331 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12332 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12333 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12334 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12335 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12336 \begin_inset Newline newline
12339 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12340 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12341 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12342 sizes than at small ones.
12343 \begin_inset Newline newline
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12365 \begin_layout Description
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12371 \begin_inset Index idx
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12380 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12381 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12382 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12383 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12384 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12385 image manipulation program.
12386 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12387 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12391 pixels high up to 34
12392 \begin_inset space ~
12395 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12396 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12397 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12399 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12400 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12401 \begin_inset Newline newline
12404 Bitmap fonts are named
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12412 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12417 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12418 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12419 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12420 use scalable fonts.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12427 \begin_layout Standard
12428 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12429 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12430 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12431 font to emphasize text, you use an
12432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12440 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12442 In \SpecialChar LyX
12443 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12447 \begin_layout Subsection
12450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12452 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12459 \begin_layout Standard
12460 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12461 used its own fonts.
12462 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12463 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12466 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12467 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12468 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12469 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12470 to a word processor.
12471 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12472 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12473 files are very portable across
12474 different machines.
12475 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12476 has increased a lot
12477 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12480 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12488 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12493 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12494 code in the document
12495 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12498 \begin_layout Standard
12499 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12500 engines that are also able directly
12501 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12503 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12505 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12507 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12508 that is installed on your system.
12509 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12512 \begin_layout Standard
12513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12521 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12522 es; so you might have to experiment.
12530 \begin_layout Standard
12531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12540 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12541 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12542 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12543 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12552 \begin_layout Subsection
12553 Document Font and Font size
12554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12556 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12561 \begin_inset Index idx
12564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12571 \begin_inset Index idx
12574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12583 \begin_layout Standard
12584 You can set the document fonts in the
12586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12590 \begin_inset Index idx
12593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12594 Document ! Settings
12604 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12605 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12608 \begin_inset space ~
12617 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12619 \begin_inset space ~
12622 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12625 \begin_layout Standard
12630 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12631 This requires that you use
12643 as the output format, i.
12644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12648 \begin_inset space \space{}
12651 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12652 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12653 installed (see section
12654 \begin_inset space ~
12658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12660 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12665 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12667 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12668 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12670 \begin_inset space ~
12673 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12674 cannot determine the family.
12675 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12676 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12679 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12682 \begin_layout Standard
12683 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12684 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12689 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12695 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12696 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12704 \begin_inset space ~
12710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12723 European Computer Modern
12726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12733 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12745 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12746 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12751 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12754 \begin_inset space ~
12759 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12765 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12766 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12769 \begin_layout Itemize
12773 \begin_inset space ~
12778 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12796 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 community in order to replace
12801 as the default font.
12802 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12803 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12820 One difference is improved kerning.
12828 \begin_layout Itemize
12832 \begin_inset space ~
12836 \begin_inset space ~
12841 fonts in (the rare) case that
12844 \begin_inset space ~
12849 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12864 Virtual means that it
12865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12876 -glyphs from other fonts.
12877 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12899 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12905 \begin_inset Index idx
12908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12910 -packages ! aeguill
12915 with the document preamble line
12916 \begin_inset Newline newline
12923 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12924 \begin_inset Newline newline
12929 will fix the guillemet problem.
12934 and that accented characters are not
12938 glyph, but built of
12942 characters, the accent and the letter.
12943 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12949 If you search for example for the French word
12950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12957 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12966 and not for the glyph
12967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12981 \begin_layout Itemize
12982 If you do not like the look of
12990 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12995 \begin_inset space ~
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13011 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13012 \begin_inset space ~
13015 serif and typewriter fonts,
13019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13020 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13027 \begin_inset space ~
13036 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13041 \begin_inset space \space{}
13049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13053 \begin_inset space \space{}
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13077 but you can also select your own.
13078 \begin_inset Newline newline
13081 The differences between roman,
13084 \begin_inset space ~
13093 fonts are explained in section
13094 \begin_inset space ~
13098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13100 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13105 \begin_inset Newline newline
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13116 was originally designed for newspapers.
13117 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13118 into the small newspaper columns.
13122 \begin_inset space ~
13127 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13130 \begin_layout Standard
13131 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13144 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13149 depends on the class you are using.
13150 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13153 \begin_layout Standard
13154 Note that the font size is the
13159 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13160 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13161 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13162 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13171 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13178 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13185 \begin_layout Standard
13189 \begin_inset space ~
13194 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13199 serif or typewriter.
13204 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13214 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13217 \begin_layout Standard
13222 LaTeX font encoding
13224 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13225 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13231 \begin_inset Index idx
13234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13236 -packages ! fontenc
13242 \begin_inset space ~
13246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13248 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13253 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13254 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13261 \begin_layout Standard
13262 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13264 Use Old Style Figures
13268 Use True Small Caps
13271 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13274 Use Old Style Figures
13276 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13278 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13286 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13290 Use True Small Caps
13292 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13293 of scaled capitals.
13294 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13295 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13298 \begin_layout Standard
13303 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13304 a font to display the script characters.
13308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13309 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13315 \begin_inset Index idx
13318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13325 So this has no effect for the document language
13339 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13343 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13351 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13356 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13357 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13359 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13361 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13364 dialog, see section
13365 \begin_inset space ~
13369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13371 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13383 \begin_layout Subsection
13387 \begin_layout Standard
13388 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13389 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13391 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13392 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13393 choose a math font in the dialog
13395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13399 \begin_inset Index idx
13402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13403 Document ! Settings
13409 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13410 automatically selects a math font.
13411 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13412 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13421 \begin_inset space ~
13427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13432 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13433 document font is available.
13436 \begin_layout Standard
13437 Note that the math font will not be used for
13441 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13447 or by the insertion of the command
13454 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13459 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13460 while the math characters do not.
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13465 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13468 \begin_inset space ~
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13481 in the document font settings.
13484 \begin_layout Standard
13485 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13486 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13487 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13488 font (in most cases
13489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13504 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13505 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13525 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 Using Different Character Styles
13527 \begin_inset Index idx
13530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13537 \begin_inset Index idx
13540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13549 \begin_layout Standard
13550 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13551 automatically changes the character style for certain
13552 paragraph environments.
13554 supports two character styles,
13563 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13567 \begin_layout Standard
13572 style, do one of the following:
13575 \begin_layout Itemize
13576 click on the toolbar button
13585 \begin_layout Itemize
13586 use the key binding
13595 \begin_layout Standard
13596 These commands are all toggles.
13601 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13605 One typically uses the
13609 style for proper names.
13611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13618 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13626 \begin_layout Standard
13627 A more widely used character style is the
13632 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13639 \begin_layout Itemize
13640 clicking on the toolbar button
13649 \begin_layout Itemize
13650 using the keybindings
13659 \begin_layout Standard
13664 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13666 use a different font.
13669 \begin_layout Standard
13670 We've been using the
13674 style all over the place in this document.
13675 Here's one more example:
13678 \begin_layout Quotation
13681 Do not overuse character styles!
13684 \begin_layout Standard
13685 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13686 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13687 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13688 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13703 \begin_inset space ~
13706 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13712 arg "dialog-show character"
13718 \begin_layout Subsection
13719 Fine-Tuning with the
13724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13726 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13731 \begin_inset Index idx
13734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13746 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13747 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13748 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13749 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13750 from ordinary dialog.
13753 \begin_layout Standard
13754 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13755 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13756 \begin_inset Newline newline
13759 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13760 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13763 \begin_layout Standard
13764 To use custom character styles, open the
13766 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13771 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13774 dialog or press the toolbar button
13777 arg "dialog-show character"
13781 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13782 font property that you can choose.
13783 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13786 \begin_inset space ~
13791 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13796 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13797 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13798 environments all at once.
13801 \begin_layout Standard
13802 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13805 \begin_inset space ~
13817 \begin_layout Labeling
13818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13832 The possible options are:
13836 \begin_layout Labeling
13837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13842 This is the Roman font family.
13843 Normally a serif font.
13844 It's also the default family.
13854 \begin_layout Labeling
13855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13859 \begin_inset space ~
13866 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13878 \begin_layout Labeling
13879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13886 This is the Typewriter font family.
13892 arg "font-typewriter"
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13907 This corresponds to the print weight.
13912 \begin_layout Labeling
13913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13918 This is the Medium font series.
13919 It's also the default series.
13922 \begin_layout Labeling
13923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13930 This is the Bold font series.
13943 \begin_layout Labeling
13944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13949 As the name implies.
13954 \begin_layout Labeling
13955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13960 This is the Upright font shape.
13961 It's also the default shape.
13964 \begin_layout Labeling
13965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 s the Italic font shape
13985 \begin_layout Labeling
13986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13993 This is the Slanted font shape
13995 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13996 , this is different from italic).
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14004 \begin_inset space ~
14011 This is the Small caps font shape
14018 \begin_layout Labeling
14019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14024 Alters the text color.
14025 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14029 \begin_inset space ~
14034 , which means that the document default color set in
14036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14043 \begin_inset space ~
14048 is used, you can choose between
14125 \begin_inset Index idx
14128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14137 \begin_layout Labeling
14138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14144 the language of the document.
14145 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14146 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14148 \begin_inset Newline newline
14151 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14153 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14154 When using the spell checking (see section
14155 \begin_inset space ~
14159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14161 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14165 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14168 \begin_layout Labeling
14169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14174 Alters the size of the font.
14175 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14176 proportional to the document font size.
14177 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14178 the details, but a general description of what
14184 \begin_layout Labeling
14185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14206 arg "font-size tiny"
14212 \begin_layout Labeling
14213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14234 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14240 \begin_layout Labeling
14241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14262 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14268 \begin_layout Labeling
14269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14290 arg "font-size small"
14296 \begin_layout Labeling
14297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14311 It's also the default size.
14315 arg "font-size normal"
14321 \begin_layout Labeling
14322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14343 arg "font-size large"
14349 \begin_layout Labeling
14350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14371 arg "font-size larger"
14377 \begin_layout Labeling
14378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14399 arg "font-size largest"
14405 \begin_layout Labeling
14406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14427 arg "font-size huge"
14433 \begin_layout Labeling
14434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14455 arg "font-size giant"
14461 \begin_layout Labeling
14462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14467 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14487 arg "font-size increase"
14493 \begin_layout Labeling
14494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14499 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14519 arg "font-size decrease"
14526 \begin_layout Standard
14531 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14532 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14534 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14535 — use those instead.
14536 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14539 \begin_layout Labeling
14540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14545 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14558 This is text with emphasize on
14561 This might seem like the same as
14565 , but it is actually a bit different.
14571 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14573 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14576 \begin_layout Labeling
14577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14584 This is text with Underbar on.
14590 arg "font-underline"
14596 \begin_inset Newline newline
14601 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14602 when you could not change fonts.
14603 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14604 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14605 because some people
14609 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14612 \begin_layout Labeling
14613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14617 \begin_inset space ~
14624 This is text with Double underbar on.
14630 arg "font-underunderline"
14634 \begin_inset Newline newline
14637 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14638 about double underbar.
14641 \begin_layout Labeling
14642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14646 \begin_inset space ~
14653 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14659 arg "font-underwave"
14663 \begin_inset Newline newline
14666 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14667 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14670 \begin_layout Labeling
14671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14678 This is text with Strikeout on.
14684 arg "font-strikeout"
14688 \begin_inset Newline newline
14691 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14692 changed in the meantime.
14695 \begin_layout Labeling
14696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14703 This is text with Noun on.
14710 , this is a logical attribute.
14711 Normally it's equivalent to
14714 \begin_inset space ~
14723 \begin_layout Standard
14724 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14725 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14727 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14729 \begin_inset space ~
14732 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14738 arg "dialog-show character"
14741 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14742 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14745 arg "textstyle-apply"
14749 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14753 \begin_layout Standard
14754 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14761 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14762 (suppose you just set the shape to
14763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14781 \begin_inset space ~
14793 \begin_layout Standard
14794 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14802 \begin_inset space ~
14814 \begin_layout Itemize
14820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14827 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14845 \begin_inset Newline newline
14849 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14863 \begin_inset Note Note
14866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14867 For more on phantoms see section
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14874 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14884 \begin_inset Newline newline
14890 \begin_layout Itemize
14895 fonts use characters with serifs.
14896 These are the small
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14904 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14905 The following example shows the difference:
14906 \begin_inset Newline newline
14910 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 text without serifs
14918 \begin_inset Newline newline
14921 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14922 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14929 \begin_layout Itemize
14934 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14935 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14936 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14939 \begin_layout Standard
14940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14947 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14948 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14956 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14957 the property to be removed.
14958 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14959 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14960 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14978 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14979 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14987 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14991 \begin_inset space ~
14996 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15007 If you, for example, set
15008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15031 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15040 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15045 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15048 \begin_layout Section
15049 Printing and Previewing
15052 \begin_layout Subsection
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15058 using \SpecialChar LyX
15059 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15060 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15061 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15062 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15064 Additional Features
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15071 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15074 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15075 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15076 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15079 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15080 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15081 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 to turn your writing into printable output.
15083 This happens in two stages:
15086 \begin_layout Enumerate
15087 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15088 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15090 a file with the extension,
15091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 \begin_layout Enumerate
15106 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15107 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15108 to use the commands in the
15112 file to produce printable output.
15115 \begin_layout Subsection
15116 Output file formats
15117 \begin_inset Index idx
15120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15129 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15137 Simple text (ASCII)
15138 \begin_inset Index idx
15141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15142 File formats ! ASCII
15150 \begin_layout Standard
15151 This file type has the extension
15152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15164 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15168 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 \begin_layout Standard
15176 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15178 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15179 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15181 \begin_inset space ~
15187 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15188 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15189 bibliography (section
15190 \begin_inset space ~
15194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15196 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15201 If your document includes such material, use
15203 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15204 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15206 \begin_inset space ~
15210 \begin_inset space ~
15214 \begin_inset space ~
15222 \begin_inset space ~
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15232 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15233 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15239 \begin_inset Index idx
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15243 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15252 \begin_layout Standard
15253 This file type has the extension
15254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15265 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15268 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15269 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15270 -Errors or to process it manually
15271 with console commands.
15272 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15273 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15274 's temporary directory whenever you
15275 view or export your document.
15278 \begin_layout Standard
15279 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15280 -file using the menu
15282 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15283 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15287 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15288 export variants are explained in section
15289 \begin_inset space ~
15293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15295 reference "subsec:Export"
15302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15304 \begin_inset Index idx
15307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15316 \begin_layout Standard
15317 This file type has the extension
15318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15338 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15339 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15340 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15345 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15346 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15347 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15348 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15349 when you view the DVI.
15350 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15353 \begin_layout Standard
15354 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15356 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15362 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15363 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 The latter option uses the program
15373 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15379 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15382 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15383 font access (see section
15384 \begin_inset space ~
15388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15390 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15395 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15396 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15403 \begin_inset Index idx
15406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15407 File formats ! PostScript
15415 \begin_layout Standard
15416 This file type has the extension
15417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15429 PostScript was developed by the company
15433 as a printer language.
15434 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15436 PostScript can be seen as a
15437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15440 programming language
15441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15449 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15456 \begin_inset Index idx
15459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15461 -packages ! pstricks
15471 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15479 Encapsulated PostScript
15480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15483 (EPS, file extension
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 As \SpecialChar LyX
15497 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15498 convert them in the background to EPS.
15499 If, for example, you have 50
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15503 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15505 \begin_inset space ~
15508 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15509 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15511 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15512 EPS to avoid this problem.
15515 \begin_layout Standard
15516 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15527 \begin_inset Index idx
15530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15537 \begin_inset Index idx
15540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 \begin_layout Standard
15550 This file type has the extension
15551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 Portable Document Format
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 was derived from PostScript.
15576 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15585 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15586 looks exactly the same.
15589 \begin_layout Standard
15590 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15598 (JPG, file extension
15599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 Portable Network Graphics
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 (PNG, file extension
15631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15643 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15644 converts them in the
15645 background to one of these formats.
15646 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15647 will slow down your workflow.
15648 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15651 \begin_layout Standard
15652 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15660 \begin_layout Description
15662 \begin_inset space ~
15665 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15669 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15672 \begin_layout Description
15674 \begin_inset space ~
15681 ) This uses the program
15683 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15686 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15689 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15692 is a new engine, derived from
15696 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15697 access (see section
15698 \begin_inset space ~
15702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15704 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15709 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15710 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15715 \begin_layout Description
15717 \begin_inset space ~
15724 ) This uses the program
15729 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15735 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15736 font access (see section
15737 \begin_inset space ~
15741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15743 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15748 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15749 vertically written Japanese.
15752 \begin_layout Description
15754 \begin_inset space ~
15757 (cropped) This is the same as
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15765 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15766 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15767 to generate good-looking
15768 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15771 \begin_layout Description
15773 \begin_inset space ~
15776 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15780 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15784 \begin_layout Description
15786 \begin_inset space ~
15789 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15793 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15794 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15798 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15799 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15802 \begin_layout Standard
15806 \begin_inset space ~
15815 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15816 works without problems.
15817 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15818 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15835 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15845 \begin_inset Index idx
15848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15849 FileFormats ! XHTML
15855 \begin_inset Index idx
15858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15867 \begin_layout Standard
15868 This file type has the extension
15869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15881 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15882 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15883 When \SpecialChar LyX
15884 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15885 suitable for the purpose.
15886 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15889 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15892 between different formats, which are described in section
15894 Math Output in XHTML
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15907 \begin_layout Standard
15908 XHTML output remains
15909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15916 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15917 features are supported yet.
15921 and the World Wide Web
15925 Additional Features
15927 manual, for more information.
15930 \begin_layout Standard
15931 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15933 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15934 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15940 \begin_layout Subsection
15942 \begin_inset Index idx
15945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15954 \begin_layout Standard
15955 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15956 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15965 or use the toolbar button
15972 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15973 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15980 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15984 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15992 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15997 Further output formats can be selected via
15999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16000 View (Other Formats)
16002 or the toolbar button
16011 \begin_layout Standard
16012 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16013 viewer window using the menu
16015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 Update (Other Formats)
16026 \begin_layout Standard
16027 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16030 To have a real output, export your document.
16033 \begin_layout Section
16034 A few Words about Typography
16035 \begin_inset Index idx
16038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16047 \begin_layout Subsection
16048 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16049 \begin_inset Index idx
16052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16059 \begin_inset Index idx
16062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16071 \begin_layout Standard
16072 In \SpecialChar LyX
16074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16085 character comes in four lengths: the
16097 , and the minus sign:
16098 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16104 \begin_layout Standard
16105 \begin_inset Tabular
16106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16108 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16109 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16110 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16111 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16140 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16180 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16207 \begin_inset space ~
16210 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16217 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16244 \begin_inset space ~
16247 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16268 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16302 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16308 \begin_layout Standard
16309 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16321 character multiple times in a row.
16322 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16323 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16356 \begin_layout Standard
16357 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16358 math mode and has a length of its own.
16359 Here are some examples:
16362 \begin_layout Enumerate
16363 line- and page-breaks
16364 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16374 \begin_layout Enumerate
16376 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16386 \begin_layout Enumerate
16387 Oh — there's a dash.
16388 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16398 \begin_layout Enumerate
16399 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16403 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16413 \begin_layout Subsection
16415 \begin_inset Index idx
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16427 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16435 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16436 but automatically in the output.
16437 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16443 \begin_inset Index idx
16446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16453 following the rules of the document language.
16456 \begin_layout Standard
16458 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16462 font and with unusual constructs, like
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16471 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16472 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16473 This is done with the menu
16475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16476 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16478 \begin_inset space ~
16484 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16486 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16490 \begin_layout Standard
16491 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16492 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16503 would then see the hyphen
16504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16511 as a hyphenation possibility.
16512 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16513 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16514 as described in section
16515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16518 Prevent Hyphenation
16519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16525 \begin_inset space ~
16533 \begin_layout Subsection
16535 \begin_inset Index idx
16538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16548 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16551 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16559 When \SpecialChar LyX
16560 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16561 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16563 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16569 appropriate amount of space.
16570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16573 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16575 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16576 gets after another word.
16579 \begin_layout Standard
16580 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16581 not work in all cases.
16583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16594 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16595 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 Here are some examples of
16603 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16606 \begin_layout Itemize
16611 \begin_layout Itemize
16616 \begin_layout Standard
16617 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16620 \begin_layout Itemize
16622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16626 this is too much space!
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16634 \begin_layout Standard
16635 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16638 \begin_layout Standard
16639 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16642 \begin_layout Enumerate
16646 \begin_inset space ~
16651 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16652 \begin_inset space ~
16656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16658 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16663 \begin_inset Index idx
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16667 Spaces ! inter-word
16675 \begin_layout Enumerate
16679 \begin_inset space ~
16684 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16685 \begin_inset space ~
16689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16691 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16696 \begin_inset Index idx
16699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16708 \begin_layout Enumerate
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16720 \begin_inset space ~
16727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16729 \begin_inset space ~
16734 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16735 This function is also bound to
16738 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16744 \begin_layout Standard
16745 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16748 \begin_layout Itemize
16750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16754 \begin_inset space \space{}
16757 this is too much space!
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16761 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16765 \begin_layout Standard
16766 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16767 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16769 will take care of this.
16772 \begin_layout Standard
16773 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16783 feature described in the section
16785 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16790 Additional Features
16795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16797 \begin_inset Index idx
16800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16801 Typography ! Quotes
16807 \begin_inset Index idx
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 \begin_layout Standard
16843 usually sets quotes correctly.
16844 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16845 and use a closing quote at the end.
16847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16855 The keyboard character,
16859 , generates this automatically.
16862 \begin_layout Standard
16863 You can specify what character the
16867 key produces using the submenu
16873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16877 \begin_inset Index idx
16880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16881 Document ! Settings
16891 There are six choices:
16894 \begin_layout Labeling
16895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 \begin_layout Labeling
16919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16922 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16926 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16932 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16936 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16942 \begin_layout Labeling
16943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16946 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16950 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16956 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16960 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16966 \begin_layout Labeling
16967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16970 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16974 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16980 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16984 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16990 \begin_layout Labeling
16991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16994 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16998 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17004 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17008 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17014 \begin_layout Labeling
17015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17018 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17022 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17028 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17032 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17042 arg "quote-insert single"
17048 \begin_layout Subsection
17050 \begin_inset Index idx
17053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17054 Typography ! Ligatures
17060 \begin_inset Index idx
17063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17094 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17101 \begin_layout Standard
17102 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17103 print them as single characters.
17104 These groups are known as
17109 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17110 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17112 Here are the standard ligatures:
17115 \begin_layout Itemize
17119 \begin_layout Itemize
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17127 \begin_layout Itemize
17131 \begin_layout Itemize
17135 \begin_layout Standard
17136 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17139 \begin_layout Standard
17140 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17141 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17149 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17165 To break a ligature, use
17167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17168 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17170 \begin_inset space ~
17177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17188 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17205 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 \begin_layout Subsection
17215 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17217 \begin_inset Index idx
17220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17230 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17244 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17247 \begin_layout Description
17249 The name of the game.
17252 \begin_layout Description
17254 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17258 \begin_layout Description
17260 The \SpecialChar TeX
17261 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17265 \begin_layout Description
17266 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17267 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17271 \begin_layout Standard
17272 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17278 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17286 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17287 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17288 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17289 converges to the number
17290 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17293 : The actual version is
17294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17302 , the previous one was
17303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17314 \begin_layout Subsection
17316 \begin_inset Index idx
17319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17328 \begin_layout Standard
17329 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17330 space between two words.
17331 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17341 for units use the menu
17343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17346 \begin_inset space ~
17354 arg "space-insert thin"
17360 \begin_layout Standard
17361 Here is an example to show the differences:
17364 \begin_layout Standard
17365 \begin_inset Tabular
17366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17367 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17368 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17369 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17392 space between number and unit
17399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17408 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17420 half space between number and unit
17433 \begin_layout Subsection
17435 \begin_inset Index idx
17438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17439 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17447 \begin_layout Standard
17448 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17450 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17451 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17452 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17453 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17454 These bits of text became known as
17465 \begin_layout Standard
17466 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17467 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17468 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17469 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17470 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17471 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17472 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17473 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17474 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17475 \begin_inset Newline newline
17483 \begin_inset Newline newline
17491 \begin_inset Newline newline
17494 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17495 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17496 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17498 \begin_inset space ~
17502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17504 key "latexcompanion"
17509 \begin_inset space ~
17513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17519 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17520 's page break mechanism.
17523 \begin_layout Chapter
17524 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17527 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17534 \begin_layout Standard
17535 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17538 \begin_inset space ~
17544 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17547 \begin_layout Section
17549 \begin_inset Index idx
17552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17568 \begin_layout Standard
17570 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17573 \begin_layout Description
17576 \begin_inset space ~
17579 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17580 \begin_inset Newline newline
17584 \begin_inset Note Note
17587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17588 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17596 \begin_layout Description
17597 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17598 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17599 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17602 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17603 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17605 \begin_inset space ~
17611 \begin_inset Newline newline
17615 \begin_inset Note Comment
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17619 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17628 \begin_layout Description
17630 \begin_inset space ~
17633 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17634 set in the document settings under
17636 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17638 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Newline newline
17648 \begin_inset Newline newline
17652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17661 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17662 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17667 of a comment that appears in the output.
17673 \begin_inset Newline newline
17677 \begin_inset Newline newline
17680 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17683 \begin_layout Standard
17684 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17696 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17699 \begin_layout Section
17701 \begin_inset Index idx
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17713 name "sec:Footnotes"
17720 \begin_layout Standard
17722 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17728 or the toolbar button
17731 arg "footnote-insert"
17743 \begin_inset Graphics
17744 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17753 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17754 's representation of your footnote.
17764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17783 label, the box will
17787 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17788 Clicking on the box label again will close
17801 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17802 and click on the footnote
17817 \begin_layout Standard
17818 Here is an example footnote:
17826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17835 \begin_layout Standard
17836 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17837 position where the footnote box is placed.
17838 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17839 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17840 according to the document class.
17842 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17843 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17849 ey are described in the
17852 \begin_inset space ~
17860 \begin_layout Section
17862 \begin_inset Index idx
17865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17874 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17881 \begin_layout Standard
17882 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17884 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17886 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17888 \begin_inset space ~
17893 or the toolbar button
17896 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17922 appearing within your text.
17923 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17924 's representation of your margin
17933 \begin_layout Standard
17934 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17938 \begin_inset Marginal
17941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17943 This is a marginal note.
17951 \begin_layout Standard
17952 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17953 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17954 pages, right on odd pages.
17957 \begin_layout Standard
17958 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17961 \begin_inset space ~
17969 \begin_inset space ~
17977 \begin_layout Section
17978 Graphics and Images
17979 \begin_inset Index idx
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17989 \begin_inset Index idx
17992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18001 name "sec:Graphics"
18008 \begin_layout Standard
18009 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18010 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18013 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18022 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18025 \begin_layout Standard
18026 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18031 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18032 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18034 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18035 \begin_inset space ~
18039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18041 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18048 \begin_layout Standard
18053 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18054 of the image in the output.
18055 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18059 \begin_inset space ~
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18072 \begin_inset space ~
18076 \begin_inset space ~
18080 \begin_inset space ~
18085 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18086 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18094 \begin_layout Standard
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18107 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18108 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18110 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18115 \begin_inset space ~
18120 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18121 with the image size is printed.
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18126 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18128 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18131 \begin_layout Standard
18133 \begin_inset Graphics
18134 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18142 \begin_layout Standard
18143 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18144 the image into a float, see section
18145 \begin_inset space ~
18149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18151 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18158 \begin_layout Subsection
18160 \begin_inset Index idx
18163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18172 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18179 \begin_layout Standard
18180 You can insert images in any known file format.
18181 But as we explained in section
18182 \begin_inset space ~
18186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18188 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18192 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18194 therefore uses the program
18198 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18199 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18200 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18201 \begin_inset space ~
18205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18207 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18214 \begin_layout Standard
18215 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18218 \begin_layout Description
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18223 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18224 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18225 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18229 Graphics Interchange Format
18230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18233 (GIF, file extension
18234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18246 \begin_inset Index idx
18249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18281 Portable Network Graphics
18282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18285 (PNG, file extension
18286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18298 \begin_inset Index idx
18301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18333 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18337 (JPG, file extension
18338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18362 \begin_inset Index idx
18365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_layout Description
18398 \begin_inset space ~
18401 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18403 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18404 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18405 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18406 \begin_inset Newline newline
18409 Scalable image formats can be
18410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18413 Scalable Vector Graphics
18414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18417 (SVG, file extension
18418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18430 \begin_inset Index idx
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18465 Encapsulated PostScript
18466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 (EPS, file extension
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 \begin_inset Index idx
18485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18517 Portable Document Format
18518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18521 (PDF, file extension
18522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18534 \begin_inset Index idx
18537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18552 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18553 result will not be scalable.
18554 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18569 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18576 \begin_layout Subsection
18577 Grouping of Image Settings
18578 \begin_inset Index idx
18581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 Images ! Settings grouping
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18593 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18594 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18596 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18597 need to manually change each of them.
18601 \begin_layout Standard
18602 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18605 \begin_inset space ~
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18621 \begin_inset space ~
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18631 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18632 and checking the name of the desired group.
18635 \begin_layout Section
18637 \begin_inset Index idx
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18656 \begin_layout Standard
18657 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18660 arg "tabular-insert"
18665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18669 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18670 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18671 from the rest of the table.
18672 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18673 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18675 Here is an example table:
18678 \begin_layout Standard
18680 \begin_inset Tabular
18681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18682 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18886 \begin_layout Subsection
18890 \begin_layout Standard
18891 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18894 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18898 This brings up the table dialog.
18899 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18900 cursor is placed currently.
18901 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18902 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18903 done on all of your selection.
18906 \begin_layout Standard
18907 In addition to the table dialog, the
18910 \begin_inset space ~
18915 helps you in setting table properties.
18916 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18919 \begin_layout Standard
18923 \begin_inset space ~
18928 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18929 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18930 current cell respectively.
18931 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18933 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18934 of text, see section
18935 \begin_inset space ~
18939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18941 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18948 \begin_layout Standard
18949 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18950 using the check box
18959 This will merge the cells to
18963 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18964 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18965 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18966 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18967 in the last row without the upper border:
18970 \begin_layout Standard
18972 \begin_inset Tabular
18973 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18974 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18976 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18977 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18978 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 \begin_layout Standard
19110 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19111 -arguments for the table.
19112 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19113 explained in the chapter
19120 \begin_inset space ~
19126 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19127 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19128 but are visible in the output.
19131 \begin_layout Standard
19132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 Most DVI-viewers are
19144 able to display rotations.
19152 \begin_layout Standard
19157 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19162 adds lines for all cell borders.
19165 \begin_layout Subsection
19167 \begin_inset Index idx
19170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 Tables ! Longtables
19177 \begin_inset Index idx
19180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 \begin_layout Standard
19190 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19206 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19207 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19210 \begin_layout Description
19215 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19216 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19217 except for the first page, if
19220 \begin_inset space ~
19228 \begin_layout Description
19232 \begin_inset space ~
19237 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19238 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19241 \begin_layout Description
19246 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19247 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19248 except for the last page, if
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19259 \begin_layout Description
19263 \begin_inset space ~
19268 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19269 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19272 \begin_layout Description
19273 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19274 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19280 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19283 \begin_inset space ~
19291 \begin_layout Standard
19292 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19293 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19294 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19300 In this context, first means first in this order:
19303 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19320 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19323 \begin_layout Standard
19325 \begin_inset Tabular
19326 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19327 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19328 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19329 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19330 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19331 <row endfirsthead="true">
19332 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19338 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19343 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19352 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19362 <row endfirsthead="true">
19363 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19374 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 <row endhead="true">
19396 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19407 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <row endhead="true">
19427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19438 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19447 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 <row endfoot="true">
19460 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19471 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <row endlastfoot="true">
21442 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 \begin_layout Subsection
21481 \begin_inset Index idx
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21493 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21500 \begin_layout Standard
21501 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21502 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21503 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21504 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21508 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21511 \begin_layout Standard
21512 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21513 for the column in the table dialog.
21514 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21515 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21519 \begin_layout Standard
21521 \begin_inset Tabular
21522 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21523 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21524 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21525 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21526 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 This is longer now.
21676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21728 This is longer now.
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 \begin_layout Standard
21760 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21761 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21767 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21773 Selection with the mouse or with
21777 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21778 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21779 the selection from outside the table.
21782 \begin_layout Section
21784 \begin_inset Index idx
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21803 \begin_layout Subsection
21807 \begin_layout Standard
21808 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21809 have a fixed location.
21811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21818 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21826 \begin_inset space ~
21831 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21832 too many notes on the current page.
21835 \begin_layout Standard
21836 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21837 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21838 and pages without text.
21839 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21840 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21841 Floats are therefore numbered.
21842 Referencing is described in section
21843 \begin_inset space ~
21847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21849 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21856 \begin_layout Standard
21857 To insert a float, use the menu
21859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21863 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21864 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21866 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21867 \begin_inset Index idx
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21877 paragraph within the float.
21878 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21879 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21880 left-clicking on the box label.
21881 A closed float box looks like this:
21882 \begin_inset Graphics
21883 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21888 – a gray button with a red label.
21891 \begin_layout Standard
21892 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21894 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21897 \begin_layout Subsection
21899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21901 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21906 \begin_inset Index idx
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 Floats ! Figure floats
21918 \begin_layout Standard
21920 \begin_inset space ~
21924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21926 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21930 was created using the menu
21932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21933 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21939 arg "float-insert figure"
21943 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21952 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21956 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21957 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21961 \begin_inset space ~
21969 arg "layout-paragraph"
21975 \begin_layout Standard
21976 \begin_inset Float figure
21981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 \begin_inset Graphics
21984 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21999 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22003 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22016 \begin_layout Standard
22017 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22018 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22020 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22029 ) and refer to it using the menu
22031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22037 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22041 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22042 vague references like
22043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22050 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22051 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22061 For more about cross-references, see section
22062 \begin_inset space ~
22066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22068 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22075 \begin_layout Standard
22076 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22077 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22078 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22079 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22080 as described in section
22081 \begin_inset space ~
22085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22087 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22093 \begin_inset space ~
22097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22099 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22103 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22104 You can also set the images one below the other.
22106 \begin_inset space ~
22110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22112 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22119 reference "fig:Platypus"
22123 are the subfigures.
22126 \begin_layout Standard
22127 \begin_inset Float figure
22132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22137 \begin_inset Float figure
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22148 name "fig:Undefinable"
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 \begin_inset Graphics
22162 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22173 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22177 \begin_inset Float figure
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22188 name "fig:Platypus"
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 \begin_inset Graphics
22202 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22214 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22226 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22230 Two distorted images.
22243 \begin_layout Subsection
22245 \begin_inset Index idx
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 Floats ! Table floats
22257 \begin_layout Standard
22258 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22261 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22264 or the toolbar button
22267 arg "float-insert table"
22271 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22272 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22273 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22275 \begin_inset space ~
22279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22281 reference "tab:Table-float"
22288 \begin_layout Standard
22289 \begin_inset Float table
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22300 name "tab:Table-float"
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 \begin_inset Tabular
22315 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22316 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22317 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22318 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22319 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22470 \end{array}\right]$
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22512 \begin_layout Subsection
22514 \begin_inset Index idx
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 \begin_layout Standard
22528 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22529 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22530 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22532 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22540 \begin_inset space ~
22548 \begin_layout Section
22550 \begin_inset Index idx
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 \begin_layout Standard
22564 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22566 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22567 \begin_inset space \space{}
22574 \begin_layout Standard
22575 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22576 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22582 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22583 and its alignment within the page.
22586 \begin_layout Standard
22588 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22598 height_special "totalheight"
22603 backgroundcolor "none"
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 This is a minipage.
22610 The text is set in an italic style.
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22617 another formatting.
22625 \begin_layout Standard
22626 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22629 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22633 as described in section
22634 \begin_inset space ~
22638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22640 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22645 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22651 \begin_layout Standard
22652 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22662 height_special "totalheight"
22667 backgroundcolor "none"
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22671 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22672 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22678 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22682 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22692 height_special "totalheight"
22697 backgroundcolor "none"
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22702 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22710 \begin_layout Standard
22711 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22717 \begin_layout Standard
22718 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22720 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22727 \begin_inset space ~
22735 \begin_layout Chapter
22736 Mathematical Formulas
22737 \begin_inset Index idx
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 \begin_inset Index idx
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22781 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22788 \begin_layout Standard
22789 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22794 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22797 \begin_layout Section
22799 \begin_inset Index idx
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 \begin_layout Standard
22812 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22825 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22827 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22828 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22829 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22837 \begin_layout Standard
22838 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22842 \begin_inset space ~
22847 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22850 \begin_layout Standard
22851 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22852 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22855 \begin_layout Standard
22856 This is a line with an inline formula
22857 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22863 \begin_layout Standard
22864 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22865 paragraph, like this one:
22866 \begin_inset Formula
22873 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22876 \begin_layout Standard
22878 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22880 For example, typing
22881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22894 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22895 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22899 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22902 \begin_inset space ~
22910 \begin_layout Subsection
22911 Navigating in Formulas
22912 \begin_inset Index idx
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 \begin_layout Standard
22925 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22926 achieved with the arrow keys.
22928 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22929 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22934 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22935 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22939 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22943 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22946 \end{array}\right]$
22954 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22959 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22960 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22963 \begin_layout Standard
22968 , printed in this document as
22969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22973 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22980 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22981 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22982 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22987 For example, if you want
22988 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22996 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23006 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23010 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23015 , since in the latter case only the
23018 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23023 will be under the square root sign:
23024 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23030 \begin_layout Standard
23031 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23033 \begin_inset Formula
23035 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23044 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23045 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23048 \begin_layout Subsection
23052 \begin_layout Standard
23053 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23054 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23058 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23059 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23060 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23061 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23062 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23066 \begin_layout Subsection
23067 Exponents and Subscripts
23068 \begin_inset Index idx
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23078 \begin_inset Index idx
23081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 \begin_layout Standard
23091 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23094 arg "math-superscript"
23100 arg "math-subscript"
23103 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23105 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23108 , type in a formula
23111 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23121 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23127 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23131 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23137 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23143 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23152 , you have to use an extra
23156 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23157 For example, if you want
23158 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23164 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23170 Subscripts are similar: To get
23171 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23177 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23185 \begin_layout Subsection
23187 \begin_inset Index idx
23190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 \begin_layout Standard
23200 Create a fraction either with the command
23206 or by using the icon
23209 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23215 \begin_inset space ~
23221 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23222 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23223 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23228 To move back up, press
23233 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23234 \begin_inset Formula
23236 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23239 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23247 \begin_layout Subsection
23249 \begin_inset Index idx
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 \begin_layout Standard
23262 Roots can be created using the
23265 \begin_inset space ~
23273 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23279 arg "math-insert \\root"
23301 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23307 always produces a square root.
23310 \begin_layout Subsection
23311 Operators with Limits
23312 \begin_inset Index idx
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23322 \begin_inset Index idx
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23334 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23341 \begin_layout Standard
23343 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23347 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23350 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23351 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23352 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23353 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23354 The sum operator will automatically place its
23355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23362 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23364 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23368 \begin_inset Formula
23370 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23375 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23379 \begin_layout Standard
23380 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23382 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23383 behind the operator and using the menu
23385 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23386 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23388 \begin_inset space ~
23392 \begin_inset space ~
23406 \begin_layout Standard
23407 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23416 \begin_inset Index idx
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23426 \begin_inset Formula
23428 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23433 which will place the
23434 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23446 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23447 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23453 \begin_layout Standard
23454 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23461 Have a look at section
23462 \begin_inset space ~
23466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23468 reference "subsec:Functions"
23472 for an explanation of function macros.
23475 \begin_layout Subsection
23477 \begin_inset Index idx
23480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 \begin_layout Standard
23490 Most math symbols can be found in the
23493 \begin_inset space ~
23498 under one of several categories; including
23515 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23519 \begin_layout Standard
23520 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23521 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23522 don't have to use the
23525 \begin_inset space ~
23530 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23532 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23535 \begin_layout Subsection
23537 \begin_inset Index idx
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23549 \begin_layout Standard
23550 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23556 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23562 \begin_inset space ~
23570 arg "math-insert \\space"
23574 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23575 For example, the sequence
23580 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23583 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23585 \begin_inset Graphics
23586 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23591 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23592 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23593 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23594 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23595 , because they are negative
23597 Here are two examples:
23600 \begin_layout Standard
23610 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23626 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23632 \begin_layout Subsection
23634 \begin_inset Index idx
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23646 name "subsec:Functions"
23653 \begin_layout Standard
23657 \begin_inset space ~
23662 contains under the button
23665 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23668 a number of function macros, such as
23669 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23673 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23681 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23688 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23689 avoid confusions, because
23690 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23694 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23700 \begin_layout Standard
23701 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23703 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23707 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23713 \begin_layout Standard
23714 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23715 are placed, as described in section
23716 \begin_inset space ~
23720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23722 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23729 \begin_layout Subsection
23731 \begin_inset Index idx
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23744 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23746 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23747 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23748 commands, for example, to enter
23749 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23752 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23753 Our example is entered by typing
23758 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23765 \begin_inset space ~
23769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23771 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23775 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23778 \begin_layout Standard
23779 \begin_inset Float table
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23785 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23790 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23794 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 \begin_inset Tabular
23805 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23806 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24325 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24391 \begin_layout Standard
24392 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24395 \begin_inset space ~
24403 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24406 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24410 \begin_layout Section
24411 Brackets and Delimiters
24412 \begin_inset Index idx
24415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 \begin_inset Index idx
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24434 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24441 \begin_layout Standard
24442 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24444 For some purposes, using just the keys
24449 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24450 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24451 toolbar delimiter icon
24454 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24458 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24459 \begin_inset Formula
24461 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24469 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24470 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24474 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24477 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24483 \begin_inset Formula
24485 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24493 \begin_layout Standard
24494 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24495 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24499 \begin_layout Standard
24500 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24501 left side and right side.
24502 If you use the option
24505 \begin_inset space ~
24510 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24511 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24513 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24518 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24519 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24522 \begin_layout Standard
24523 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24524 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24525 is to go inside the brackets.
24526 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24531 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24532 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24533 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24537 arg "math-delim ( )"
24543 \begin_layout Section
24544 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24545 \begin_inset Index idx
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 \begin_inset Index idx
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 \begin_inset Index idx
24568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24569 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24577 \begin_layout Standard
24578 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24582 \begin_inset space ~
24590 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24594 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24595 Here is an example:
24596 \begin_inset Formula
24598 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24607 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24608 \begin_inset space ~
24612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24614 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24619 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24620 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24621 This alignment is set in the box
24626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24675 for every column as default.
24676 For example, the sequence
24677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24688 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24689 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24690 corresponds to the relevant column.
24691 The result will look like this:
24692 \begin_inset Formula
24695 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24696 column & has & has\,right\\
24697 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24706 \begin_layout Standard
24707 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24710 arg "newline-insert newline"
24713 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24714 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24716 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24719 or the math toolbar.
24722 \begin_layout Standard
24723 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24724 It can be created with the menu
24726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24727 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24729 \begin_inset space ~
24741 Here is an example:
24742 \begin_inset Formula
24756 \begin_layout Standard
24757 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24760 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24763 arg "newline-insert newline"
24767 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24772 arg "newline-insert newline"
24775 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24783 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24784 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24785 A new row is created by every further entry of
24788 arg "newline-insert newline"
24792 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24793 Here is an example:
24794 \begin_inset Formula
24796 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24797 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24802 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24803 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24804 \begin_inset Formula
24806 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24814 \begin_layout Standard
24815 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24822 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24823 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24826 reference "eq:asquared"
24831 The other types are described in section
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24838 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24845 \begin_layout Section
24846 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24847 \begin_inset Index idx
24850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24851 Math ! Formula numbering
24857 \begin_inset Index idx
24860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24861 Math ! Referencing formulas
24867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24869 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24876 \begin_layout Standard
24877 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24879 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24880 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24882 \begin_inset space ~
24886 \begin_inset space ~
24894 arg "math-number-toggle"
24898 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24899 within parentheses.
24900 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24901 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24902 the document class.
24903 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24904 separated by a dot:
24905 \begin_inset Formula
24915 arg "math-number-toggle"
24918 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24919 You can only number displayed formulas.
24922 \begin_layout Standard
24923 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24925 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24926 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24928 \begin_inset space ~
24932 \begin_inset space ~
24940 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24943 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24944 \begin_inset Formula
24947 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24953 To number all lines use the shortcut
24956 arg "math-number-toggle"
24962 \begin_layout Standard
24963 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24966 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24967 A label is inserted with the menu
24969 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24978 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24979 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24980 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24992 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24993 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24994 We inserted in the following example the label
24995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25002 in the second line:
25003 \begin_inset Formula
25005 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25006 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25011 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25012 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25013 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25017 \begin_inset space ~
25025 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25029 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25030 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25031 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25032 as the formula number:
25035 \begin_layout Standard
25036 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25039 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25046 \begin_layout Standard
25047 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25048 's cross-reference box are described in section
25049 \begin_inset space ~
25053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25055 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25060 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25068 \begin_layout Section
25069 User defined math macros
25070 \begin_inset Index idx
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25084 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25085 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25086 Math macros are explained in section
25089 \begin_inset space ~
25101 \begin_layout Section
25105 \begin_layout Subsection
25107 \begin_inset Index idx
25110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25119 \begin_layout Standard
25120 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25121 To set a font in a formula, use the
25124 \begin_inset space ~
25132 arg "math-insert \\font"
25135 , or enter its command, listed in table
25136 \begin_inset space ~
25140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25142 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25149 \begin_layout Standard
25150 \begin_inset Float table
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25161 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25165 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 \begin_inset Tabular
25176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25177 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25413 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_layout Standard
25448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25472 \begin_layout Standard
25473 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25474 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25479 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25480 space when you need a space in the box.
25481 Here is an example where
25482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25493 denotes the set of numbers:
25494 \begin_inset Formula
25496 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25504 \begin_layout Standard
25505 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25506 You can, for example, put a character in
25515 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25519 \begin_inset Newline newline
25522 So it is better not to use this feature.
25525 \begin_layout Standard
25526 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25527 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25531 \begin_inset Newline newline
25534 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25540 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25541 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25554 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25557 \begin_layout Standard
25558 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25560 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25561 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25563 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_layout Subsection
25573 \begin_inset Index idx
25576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 \begin_layout Standard
25586 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25588 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25592 \begin_inset space ~
25596 \begin_inset space ~
25604 \begin_inset space ~
25612 arg "math-insert \\font"
25616 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25617 in black instead of blue.
25618 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25619 Here is an example:
25620 \begin_inset Formula
25623 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25624 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25633 \begin_layout Subsection
25635 \begin_inset Index idx
25638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25649 automatically chosen in most situations.
25667 For most characters,
25675 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25676 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25681 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25682 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25683 thinks are appropriate.
25684 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25687 arg "math-insert \\style"
25691 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25692 For example, you can set
25693 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25696 , which is normally in
25705 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25709 The four styles are used in the following example:
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25713 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25717 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25721 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25725 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25732 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25733 is set in a particular size with the menu
25735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25737 \begin_inset space ~
25742 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25743 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25744 will be adjusted to correspond.
25745 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25756 \begin_layout Standard
25760 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25766 \begin_layout Section
25767 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25769 \begin_inset Index idx
25772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 \begin_inset Index idx
25782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25791 \begin_layout Standard
25793 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25794 that are in common use.
25797 \begin_layout Subsection
25798 Enabling AMS-Support
25801 \begin_layout Standard
25802 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25803 the document by selecting the checkbox
25806 \begin_inset space ~
25810 \begin_inset space ~
25814 \begin_inset space ~
25821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25825 \begin_inset Index idx
25828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25829 Document ! Settings
25837 \begin_inset space ~
25843 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25844 -errors in formulas,
25845 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25848 \begin_layout Subsection
25850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25852 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25857 \begin_inset Index idx
25860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25861 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25869 \begin_layout Standard
25870 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25871 provides a selection of different formula types.
25873 allows you to choose between
25894 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25895 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25901 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25904 \begin_layout Chapter
25908 \begin_layout Section
25910 \begin_inset Index idx
25913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25922 name "sec:Cross-References"
25929 \begin_layout Standard
25930 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25931 's strengths is cross-references.
25932 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25934 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25935 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25936 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25939 \begin_layout Enumerate
25943 \begin_layout Enumerate
25944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25946 name "enu:Second-item"
25953 \begin_layout Enumerate
25957 \begin_layout Standard
25958 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25963 or by pressing the toolbar button
25970 A gray label box like this:
25971 \begin_inset Graphics
25972 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25977 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25979 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26014 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26015 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26031 \begin_layout Standard
26032 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26037 or the toolbar button
26040 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26044 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26045 \begin_inset Graphics
26046 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26051 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26053 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26066 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26070 \begin_layout Standard
26071 As an alternative to
26073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26076 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26081 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26082 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26096 \begin_layout Standard
26097 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26098 \begin_inset space ~
26102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26104 reference "enu:Second-item"
26111 \begin_layout Standard
26112 It is recommended to use a protected space
26116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 described in section
26118 \begin_inset space ~
26122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26124 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26133 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26134 line breaks between them.
26137 \begin_layout Standard
26138 There are six formats of cross-references:
26141 \begin_layout Description
26142 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26145 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26152 \begin_layout Description
26153 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26154 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26166 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26173 \begin_layout Description
26174 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26175 \begin_inset space ~
26179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26180 LatexCommand pageref
26181 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26188 \begin_layout Description
26190 \begin_inset space ~
26194 \begin_inset space ~
26197 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26199 LatexCommand vpageref
26200 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26205 \begin_inset Newline newline
26208 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26209 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26210 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26211 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26212 it prints “on the next page”.
26213 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26216 \begin_layout Description
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_inset space ~
26226 \begin_inset space ~
26229 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26232 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26237 \begin_inset Newline newline
26240 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26246 ; otherwise it behaves like
26250 \begin_inset space ~
26254 \begin_inset space ~
26263 \begin_layout Description
26265 \begin_inset space ~
26268 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26269 \begin_inset Newline newline
26273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26281 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26291 \begin_inset Index idx
26294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26296 -packages ! prettyref
26302 \begin_inset Index idx
26305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26307 -packages ! refstyle
26318 \begin_inset Newline newline
26321 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26322 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26325 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26338 is the default and preferred because
26342 supports only English documents.
26343 The format is specified by using the command
26355 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26356 preamble of the document.
26357 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26370 ) can be done with this command
26371 \begin_inset Newline newline
26378 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26383 \begin_inset Newline newline
26386 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26388 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26390 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26397 \begin_layout Description
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26402 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26404 LatexCommand nameref
26405 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26412 \begin_layout Standard
26413 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26414 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26416 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26420 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26424 \begin_layout Standard
26425 You can only use the style
26429 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26433 is always possible.
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26437 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26438 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26440 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26441 \begin_inset space ~
26445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26447 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26454 \begin_layout Standard
26455 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26459 \begin_inset space ~
26463 \begin_inset space ~
26468 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26469 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26472 \begin_inset space ~
26477 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26478 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26481 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26487 \begin_layout Standard
26488 You can change labels at any time.
26489 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26490 do not need to think about this.
26493 \begin_layout Standard
26494 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26496 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26500 \begin_layout Standard
26501 References are described in detail in the section
26502 \begin_inset space ~
26506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26516 \begin_inset space ~
26524 \begin_layout Section
26525 Table of Contents and other Listings
26526 \begin_inset Index idx
26529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 \begin_inset Index idx
26539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26555 \begin_layout Subsection
26557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26559 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26566 \begin_layout Standard
26567 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26570 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26572 \begin_inset space ~
26576 \begin_inset space ~
26582 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26584 If you click on it, the
26588 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26589 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26590 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26592 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26594 \begin_inset space ~
26599 that is described in section
26600 \begin_inset space ~
26604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26606 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26615 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26617 \begin_inset space ~
26621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26623 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26627 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26629 \begin_inset space ~
26633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26635 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26639 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26641 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26644 \begin_layout Subsection
26645 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26648 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26655 \begin_layout Standard
26656 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26658 You can insert them via the
26660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26664 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26667 \begin_layout Section
26668 URLs and Hyperlinks
26669 \begin_inset Index idx
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 \begin_inset Index idx
26682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 \begin_layout Subsection
26693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26703 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26714 \begin_inset Flex URL
26717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26727 \begin_layout Standard
26728 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26734 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26738 \begin_layout Standard
26739 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26747 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26756 \begin_layout Subsection
26758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26760 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26767 \begin_layout Standard
26768 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26773 or with the toolbar button
26780 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26789 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26790 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26793 name "LyX's homepage"
26794 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26798 , an Email address like this:
26799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26801 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26802 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26807 , or a link to a file.
26810 \begin_layout Standard
26811 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26824 to the link target.
26827 \begin_layout Standard
26828 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26829 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26830 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26831 the text style dialog.
26832 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26836 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26838 name "LyX's homepage"
26839 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26846 \begin_layout Standard
26847 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26851 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26854 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26858 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26860 \begin_inset Newline newline
26868 \begin_inset Newline newline
26875 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26878 \begin_layout Section
26880 \begin_inset Index idx
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26892 name "sec:Appendices"
26899 \begin_layout Standard
26900 Appendices are created with the menu
26902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26904 \begin_inset space ~
26908 \begin_inset space ~
26914 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26915 as the appendix part of the book.
26916 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26919 \begin_layout Standard
26920 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26921 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26922 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26923 and the subsection number.
26924 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26930 \begin_inset space ~
26934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26936 reference "chap:Credits"
26941 \begin_inset space ~
26945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26947 reference "subsec:Export"
26954 \begin_layout Section
26956 \begin_inset Index idx
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26968 name "sec:Bibliography"
26975 \begin_layout Standard
26976 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26978 You can include a bibliography database,
26982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26983 Known under the name
26984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26987 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26997 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26998 manually, using the paragraph environment
27002 , which was described in section
27003 \begin_inset space ~
27007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27009 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27014 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27015 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27019 use a bibliography database.
27022 \begin_layout Subsection
27023 The Bibliography Environment
27026 \begin_layout Standard
27031 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27033 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27042 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27044 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27054 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27057 \begin_layout Standard
27058 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27063 or the toolbar button
27066 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27070 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27071 containing the available citations.
27072 Select one or more keys from the list and
27082 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27083 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27088 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27089 entry with surrounding brackets.
27094 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27095 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27107 \begin_layout Standard
27111 Companion Second Edition
27114 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27116 key "latexcompanion"
27123 \begin_layout Standard
27124 The \SpecialChar LyX
27125 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27126 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27135 \begin_layout Standard
27136 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27139 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27141 \begin_inset space ~
27149 arg "layout-paragraph"
27153 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27156 \begin_layout Subsection
27157 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27159 \begin_inset Index idx
27162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27163 Bibliography ! Databases
27169 \begin_inset Index idx
27172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27182 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27198 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27199 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27204 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27206 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27207 your working field in a database.
27208 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27209 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27210 list for that document.
27211 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27215 \begin_layout Standard
27216 The database is a text file with the file extension
27217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27228 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27229 The format is explained in
27230 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27236 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27240 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27245 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27246 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27247 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27249 \begin_inset Flex URL
27252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27254 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 To use a database, use the menu
27265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27270 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27272 \begin_inset space ~
27278 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27279 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27286 Add bibliography to TOC
27288 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27293 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27294 in the document or just the cited references.
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27298 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27310 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27311 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27312 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27313 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27315 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27321 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27322 \begin_inset Newline newline
27326 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27328 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27346 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27348 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27356 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27361 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27362 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27363 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27367 The following variants are possible:
27370 \begin_layout Description
27371 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27372 with other bibliography packages (e.
27373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27377 \begin_inset space \space{}
27384 ), only with the package
27388 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27392 \begin_layout Description
27393 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27394 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27395 with all bibliography packages, except
27400 \begin_layout Description
27401 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27406 , works with all bibliography packages
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27411 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27413 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27416 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27420 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 When you select the option
27432 Sectioned bibliography
27436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27437 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27440 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27441 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27443 Customizing Bibliographies
27447 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27452 Additional Features
27457 \begin_layout Standard
27458 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27459 the two methods of creating them.
27460 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27461 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27462 We used the style file
27466 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27469 \begin_layout Subsection
27471 \begin_inset Index idx
27474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27475 Bibliography ! Citation format
27483 \begin_layout Standard
27484 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27485 For this feature you need to enable the option
27491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 \begin_inset Index idx
27498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27499 Document ! Settings
27509 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27510 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27511 style files as explained in
27512 the previous section.
27515 \begin_layout Standard
27516 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27517 the citation reference window.
27518 Here is an example where the text
27519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27523 \begin_inset space ~
27527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27530 appears after the reference:
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27535 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27538 key "latexcompanion"
27545 \begin_layout Section
27547 \begin_inset Index idx
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27566 \begin_layout Standard
27567 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27576 or the toolbar button
27583 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27584 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27585 by \SpecialChar LyX
27586 as the index entry.
27589 \begin_layout Standard
27590 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27593 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27601 A light blue box labeled
27602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27613 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27614 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27618 \begin_layout Standard
27619 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27620 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27621 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27622 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27626 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27633 \begin_layout Subsection
27634 Grouping Index Entries
27635 \begin_inset Index idx
27638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27647 \begin_layout Standard
27648 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27650 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27651 lists under the entry
27652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27660 First we create the entry
27661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27675 reference "subsec:Lists"
27680 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27681 \begin_inset space ~
27685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27687 reference "sec:Itemize"
27691 , we insert the command
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27700 \begin_layout Standard
27704 \begin_layout Standard
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 for the enumerated list in section
27712 \begin_inset space ~
27716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27718 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27726 The exclamation mark
27727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27734 marks the grouping levels.
27735 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27736 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27737 If we don't have an index entry for
27738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27745 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27748 \begin_layout Subsection
27750 \begin_inset Index idx
27753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27754 Index ! Page ranges
27762 \begin_layout Standard
27763 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27765 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27766 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27767 an index entry in section
27768 \begin_inset space ~
27772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27774 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27781 \begin_layout Standard
27784 Paragraph environments|(
27787 \begin_layout Standard
27788 and another entry at the end of section
27789 \begin_inset space ~
27793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27795 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27802 \begin_layout Standard
27805 Paragraph environments|)
27808 \begin_layout Standard
27810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27833 respectively start and end the index range.
27834 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27835 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27836 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27837 An example is the index entry
27838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27841 Document ! Settings
27842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27848 \begin_layout Subsection
27850 \begin_inset Index idx
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27854 Index ! Cross referencing
27862 \begin_layout Standard
27863 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27864 We referred for example in the index entry
27865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27873 \begin_inset space ~
27877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27879 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27883 ) to the index entry
27884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27891 in the same section using the entry
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27897 GIF|see{Image formats}
27900 \begin_layout Standard
27901 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27903 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27904 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27907 \begin_layout Subsection
27909 \begin_inset Index idx
27912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 Index ! Entry order
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27923 follow the rules for the index order.
27924 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27930 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27932 \begin_inset space ~
27936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27938 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27947 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27948 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27973 \begin_inset Index idx
27976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27977 Dummy entries ! maïs
27983 \begin_inset Index idx
27986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 Dummy entries ! maître
27993 \begin_inset Index idx
27996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27997 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28002 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28003 maïs, maison, maître.
28004 To achieve this, we use the command
28007 \begin_layout Standard
28010 previous entry@current entry
28013 \begin_layout Standard
28014 In our case we want to have
28015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28030 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28039 \begin_layout Standard
28040 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28041 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28043 See the next subsection for an example.
28046 \begin_layout Standard
28047 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28054 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28059 to generate the index (see sec.
28060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28066 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28075 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28076 -package aeguill in sec.
28077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28083 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28087 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28088 -packages although all these index
28089 commands start with
28090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28103 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28108 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28111 \begin_layout Standard
28123 \begin_layout Standard
28135 \begin_layout Subsection
28137 \begin_inset Index idx
28140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28141 Index ! Entry layout
28149 \begin_layout Standard
28150 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28151 \begin_inset Index idx
28154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28157 This is an italic dummy entry
28162 You can also format the page number using the character
28163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28170 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28171 -command without a backslash.
28172 We can write for example
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28178 italic page number:|textit
28181 \begin_layout Standard
28182 to get the page number in italic.
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28192 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28193 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28211 \begin_inset space ~
28217 Have a look at section
28218 \begin_inset space ~
28222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28224 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28228 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28232 \begin_layout Standard
28233 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28241 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28245 to generate the index, see sec.
28246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28252 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28261 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28266 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28270 key "latexcompanion"
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28283 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28285 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28286 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28287 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28288 If so, put the following in the preamble
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28303 \begin_layout Standard
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 in the index entry.
28315 \begin_inset Index idx
28318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28324 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28325 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28326 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28329 \begin_layout Standard
28330 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28331 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28332 a bold font for all index entries.
28333 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28345 documentation for details,
28346 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28348 key "makeindex,xindy"
28355 \begin_layout Subsection
28357 \begin_inset Index idx
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28369 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28376 \begin_layout Standard
28377 If the index generation program
28381 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28382 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28386 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28387 distribution, is used.
28391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28396 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28397 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28398 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28399 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28400 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28410 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28412 dialog, see section
28413 \begin_inset space ~
28417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28419 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28424 The available options are listed and explained in
28425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28427 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28432 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28436 \begin_layout Standard
28437 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28438 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28446 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28447 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28450 \begin_layout Subsection
28454 \begin_layout Standard
28455 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28456 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28464 next to the standard index.
28466 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28467 that add this feature.
28474 \begin_inset Index idx
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28479 -packages ! splitidx
28484 package to generate multiple indexes.
28485 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28500 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28501 style, but it also includes
28502 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28503 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28511 \begin_layout Standard
28512 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28513 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28515 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28516 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28519 and select the option
28521 Use multiple Indexes
28528 already contains the standard index
28529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28537 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28538 also appear as a heading) to the
28542 input field and press the
28547 The new index now also appears in the list.
28548 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28549 label color to the new index.
28552 \begin_layout Standard
28553 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28563 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28564 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28565 are additional features:
28568 \begin_layout Itemize
28569 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28570 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28573 \begin_layout Itemize
28574 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28575 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28583 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28584 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28585 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28586 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28589 \begin_layout Section
28590 Nomenclature/Glossary
28591 \begin_inset Index idx
28594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28601 \begin_inset Index idx
28604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28635 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28642 \begin_layout Standard
28643 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28644 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28645 called nomenclature or glossary.
28648 \begin_layout Standard
28649 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28656 \begin_inset Index idx
28659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28661 -packages ! nomencl
28667 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28669 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28675 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28679 \begin_layout Standard
28680 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28681 and then use the menu
28683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28689 \begin_inset space ~
28694 or the toolbar button
28697 arg "nomencl-insert"
28702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28713 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28717 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28718 The first is the term or
28722 that you wish to define.
28727 of the term or symbol.
28730 \begin_layout Standard
28731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28739 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28740 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28748 \begin_layout Subsection
28749 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28750 \begin_inset Index idx
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 Nomenclature ! Layout
28762 \begin_layout Standard
28763 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28767 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28774 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28782 \begin_inset Newline newline
28790 \begin_inset Newline newline
28796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28803 character starts/ends the formula.
28804 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28805 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28817 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28827 \begin_layout Standard
28828 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28829 -syntax is given in section
28830 \begin_inset space ~
28834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28836 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28843 \begin_layout Standard
28847 \begin_inset space ~
28852 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28854 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28859 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28866 in this document is:
28867 \begin_inset Newline newline
28872 dummy entry for the character
28877 \begin_inset Newline newline
28889 \begin_inset space ~
28899 font use the command
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28934 \begin_inset space \space{}
28938 \begin_inset Newline newline
28954 \begin_inset Newline newline
28957 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28958 This command will make the font of all symbols
28965 \begin_inset space ~
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 If the characters |
28975 \begin_inset space \space{}
28979 \begin_inset space \space{}
28983 \begin_inset space \space{}
28987 \begin_inset space \space{}
28991 \begin_inset space \space{}
28994 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28995 a quote character in front of them.
28996 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28997 LatexCommand nomenclature
28998 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28999 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29006 \begin_layout Subsection
29007 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29008 \begin_inset Index idx
29011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29012 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29020 \begin_layout Standard
29021 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29022 -code of the symbol
29024 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29026 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29029 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29030 LatexCommand nomenclature
29032 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29039 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29043 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29044 LatexCommand nomenclature
29047 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29052 They will be sorted by
29053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29079 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29082 will be sorted before the
29086 since the character
29087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29094 is considered in sorting.
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29098 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29101 \begin_inset space ~
29106 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29107 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29109 For the example given, you can insert
29113 in this field for the
29114 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29121 will be located before
29122 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29128 \begin_layout Standard
29129 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29134 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29143 \begin_layout Subsection
29144 Nomenclature Options
29145 \begin_inset Index idx
29148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29149 Nomenclature ! Options
29157 \begin_layout Standard
29162 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29163 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29166 \begin_layout Description
29167 refeq Appends the phrase
29168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29183 to every nomenclature entry, where
29189 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29192 \begin_layout Description
29193 refpage Appends the phrase
29194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29209 to every nomenclature entry, where
29215 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29218 \begin_layout Description
29219 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29222 \begin_layout Standard
29223 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29224 class options list in the
29226 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29230 In this document the options
29237 \begin_layout Standard
29238 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29244 \begin_layout Standard
29245 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29246 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29251 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29254 \begin_layout Description
29264 \begin_layout Description
29267 nomrefpage Like the
29274 \begin_layout Description
29277 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29286 \begin_layout Description
29290 \begin_inset space ~
29296 \begin_inset space ~
29301 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29304 \begin_layout Standard
29306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29313 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29314 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29318 \begin_layout Standard
29326 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29329 \begin_inset Newline newline
29336 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29341 \begin_inset Newline newline
29345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29360 by their translation.
29363 \begin_layout Subsection
29364 Printing the Nomenclature
29365 \begin_inset Index idx
29368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29369 Nomenclature ! Printing
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29378 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29381 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29397 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29398 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29399 You can choose between these settings:
29402 \begin_layout Description
29403 Default a space of 1
29404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29410 \begin_layout Description
29412 \begin_inset space ~
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29419 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29422 \begin_layout Description
29423 Custom custom space
29426 \begin_layout Standard
29427 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29436 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29444 For example, in order to change the name to
29448 , add the following line to the preamble:
29451 \begin_layout Standard
29459 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29462 \begin_layout Subsection
29463 Nomenclature Program
29464 \begin_inset Index idx
29467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29468 Nomenclature ! Program
29474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29476 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29483 \begin_layout Standard
29489 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29490 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29492 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29497 by adding options, see section
29498 \begin_inset space ~
29502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29504 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29509 The available options are listed and explained in
29510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29512 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29519 \begin_layout Section
29521 \begin_inset Index idx
29524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29531 \begin_inset Index idx
29534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29535 Document ! Branches
29541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29543 name "sec:Branches"
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29551 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29552 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29553 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29554 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29557 \begin_layout Standard
29558 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29559 allows you to put text into branches.
29560 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29561 To create a branch, either select the menu
29563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29564 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29567 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29576 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29577 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29578 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29579 and whether the name of the branch should
29580 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29581 (see below for an example).
29582 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29583 to the name of the other) and to add
29584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29596 \begin_inset space ~
29599 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29600 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29603 \begin_layout Standard
29604 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29605 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29610 where you can choose a branch.
29611 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29616 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29617 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29620 \begin_layout Standard
29621 \begin_inset Branch Question
29624 \begin_layout Standard
29625 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29637 \begin_layout Standard
29638 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29646 \begin_layout Standard
29653 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29654 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29657 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29658 Consider for example a file
29659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29666 which has the above branches.
29668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29675 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29699 branch were inactive,
29700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29715 branch was active, likewise
29716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29731 branch was active, and
29732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29735 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29739 if both branches were active.
29740 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29743 \begin_layout Standard
29744 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29750 \begin_layout Standard
29751 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29752 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29753 definitions for each branch.
29754 For example you can define for the question branch
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29759 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29760 -syntax, see section
29761 \begin_inset space ~
29765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29767 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29779 \begin_layout Standard
29789 \begin_layout Standard
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29800 and for the answer branch
29803 \begin_layout Standard
29813 \begin_layout Standard
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 \begin_inset Branch Question
29827 \begin_layout Standard
29831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29859 \begin_layout Standard
29860 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29863 \begin_layout Standard
29867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29895 \begin_layout Standard
29896 Now it is possible to use the
29900 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29907 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29910 commands to obtain conditional output.
29911 Here is an example formula where only the
29918 \begin_inset Formula
29920 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29928 \begin_layout Standard
29929 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29944 \begin_inset space \space{}
29947 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29949 For this advanced usage, see the
29954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29957 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29964 \begin_layout Section
29966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29968 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29973 \begin_inset Index idx
29976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29989 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29992 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29994 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30000 \begin_inset Index idx
30003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30005 -packages ! hyperref
30010 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30011 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30012 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30013 part of the document.
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30018 The header information in the dialog tab
30022 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30023 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30024 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30025 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30029 \begin_inset space ~
30033 \begin_inset space ~
30038 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30039 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30040 and author entries.
30044 \begin_inset space ~
30048 \begin_inset space ~
30052 \begin_inset space ~
30057 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30061 You can specify in the dialog tab
30065 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30078 \begin_inset space ~
30083 option allows long links to be split;
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30090 \begin_inset space ~
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30102 \begin_inset space ~
30107 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30110 \begin_inset space ~
30115 colors the different links.
30116 The default colors are:
30119 \begin_layout Labeling
30120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30125 for hyperlinks and URLs
30128 \begin_layout Labeling
30129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30137 \begin_layout Labeling
30138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30146 \begin_layout Standard
30147 but you can change these in the field
30152 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30155 \begin_layout Standard
30158 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30161 \begin_layout Standard
30166 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30167 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30168 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30171 \begin_layout Standard
30176 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30177 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30178 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30188 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30189 when opening the PDF.
30191 \begin_inset space ~
30194 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30195 \begin_inset space ~
30198 1 will only display the sections.
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30203 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30209 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30210 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30219 \begin_layout Section
30221 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30225 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30232 \begin_layout Subsection
30235 \begin_inset Index idx
30238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30248 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30255 \begin_layout Standard
30256 As \SpecialChar LyX
30257 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30258 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30259 commands and constructs,
30262 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30263 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30264 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30265 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30266 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30267 cannot support all packages and
30271 \begin_layout Standard
30272 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30273 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30274 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30278 Code box is created by the menu
30280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30282 \begin_inset space ~
30287 or by the toolbar button
30300 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30308 \begin_layout Standard
30309 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30311 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30313 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30314 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30321 , you can write the command part
30327 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30328 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30332 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30333 Code box behind the word.
30334 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30335 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30339 \begin_layout Standard
30340 \begin_inset Graphics
30341 filename clipart/ERT.png
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30353 \begin_layout Standard
30354 This is a line with a
30358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30381 \begin_layout Standard
30382 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30390 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30391 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30392 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30393 know that the command is finished.
30401 \begin_layout Subsection
30402 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30404 \begin_inset Argument 1
30407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30408 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30415 \begin_inset Index idx
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30428 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30436 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30437 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30438 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30439 uses in the background.
30440 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30441 is based on commands, you can
30442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30450 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30451 any time if you know the right commands.
30452 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30453 is the end of the day.
30454 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30455 all caption labels bold.
30456 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30458 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30462 \begin_layout Standard
30463 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30465 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30467 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30479 \begin_layout Standard
30480 As result you find that the package
30485 \begin_inset Index idx
30488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30490 -packages ! caption
30496 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30501 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30505 \begin_inset space ~
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30518 usepackage[options]{package name}
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30522 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30523 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30524 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30525 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30528 \begin_layout Standard
30529 In your case the package name is
30534 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30539 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30540 So you add the command
30543 \begin_layout Standard
30548 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30552 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 For more commands provided by the
30561 package, have a look at its documentation,
30562 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30576 \begin_layout Standard
30577 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30579 For example if you use a
30583 class, you don't need the package
30587 , you can instead write
30590 \begin_layout Standard
30595 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30600 \begin_layout Standard
30601 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30602 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30603 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30610 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30613 \begin_layout Standard
30614 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30615 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30617 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30618 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30619 Code box as described in the previous
30623 \begin_layout Standard
30624 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30625 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30630 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30644 \begin_layout Standard
30648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 \begin_inset Note Note
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30662 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30670 \begin_layout Left Header
30671 \begin_inset Argument 1
30674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 \begin_inset Note Note
30697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30698 defines the header line as described below
30706 \begin_layout Center Header
30707 \begin_inset Argument 1
30710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 \begin_layout Right Header
30720 \begin_inset Argument 1
30723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30744 \begin_layout Left Footer
30745 \begin_inset Argument 1
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30769 \begin_layout Center Footer
30770 \begin_inset Argument 1
30773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30785 \begin_inset Newline newline
30789 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30795 \begin_layout Right Footer
30796 \begin_inset Argument 1
30799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30821 \begin_layout Section
30822 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30825 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 Document ! Header/Footer line
30840 \begin_inset Index idx
30843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30852 \begin_layout Standard
30853 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30868 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30874 \begin_inset space ~
30880 As a second step add in the menu
30882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30890 Custom Header/Footerlines
30891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30895 This module offers the following 6
30896 \begin_inset space ~
30902 \begin_layout Description
30904 \begin_inset space ~
30908 \begin_inset space ~
30912 \begin_inset space ~
30916 \begin_inset space ~
30920 \begin_inset space ~
30926 \begin_layout Description
30928 \begin_inset space ~
30932 \begin_inset space ~
30936 \begin_inset space ~
30940 \begin_inset space ~
30944 \begin_inset space ~
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30954 \begin_layout Standard
30955 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30956 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30958 \begin_inset space ~
30962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30964 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30968 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30971 \begin_layout Standard
30972 \begin_inset Float figure
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 \begin_inset Tabular
30982 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30983 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30984 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30985 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30986 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31017 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31046 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31050 The normal text on the page goes here.
31051 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31053 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31054 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31059 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31068 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31097 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31149 name "fig:Page-layout"
31153 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31166 \begin_layout Standard
31167 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31175 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31179 \begin_inset space ~
31184 is set to “Default”.
31185 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31194 \begin_layout Subsection
31198 \begin_layout Standard
31199 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31200 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31201 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31202 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31204 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31205 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31208 \begin_layout Standard
31209 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31210 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31216 \begin_inset space ~
31224 \begin_layout Description
31227 thepage prints the current page number
31230 \begin_layout Description
31233 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31236 \begin_layout Description
31239 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31242 \begin_layout Description
31245 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31246 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31253 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31256 because it usually goes in a left header.
31259 \begin_layout Description
31262 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31263 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31265 It is normally used in the right header.
31268 \begin_layout Subsection
31269 Default header/footer
31272 \begin_layout Standard
31273 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31274 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31275 footer has the page number.
31276 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31277 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31278 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31281 \begin_inset space ~
31289 \begin_layout Subsection
31293 \begin_layout Standard
31294 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31295 Some pages are different.
31296 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31297 a new part or chapter in your book.
31298 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31299 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31300 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31304 Header and footer decoration line
31307 \begin_layout Standard
31308 By default, you get a 0.4
31309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31312 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31313 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31325 in the following way:
31328 \begin_layout Standard
31335 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31338 \begin_layout Standard
31339 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31348 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31355 \begin_layout Standard
31356 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31358 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31359 \begin_inset space ~
31363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31373 Several header/footer lines
31376 \begin_layout Standard
31377 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31378 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31379 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31381 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31399 \begin_inset space ~
31407 \begin_layout Standard
31414 headheight}{height}
31417 \begin_layout Standard
31418 where height is a size in standard units.
31419 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31420 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31421 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31422 logfile with the menu
31424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31430 \begin_inset space ~
31435 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31440 \begin_inset Index idx
31443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31445 -packages ! fancyhdr
31451 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31452 for your header/footer.
31455 \begin_layout Subsection
31459 \begin_layout Standard
31460 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31461 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31462 This example consists of the following definition:
31465 \begin_layout Description
31467 \begin_inset space ~
31476 , empty optional argument
31479 \begin_layout Description
31481 \begin_inset space ~
31484 Header empty, empty optional argument
31487 \begin_layout Description
31489 \begin_inset space ~
31498 in the optional argument
31501 \begin_layout Description
31503 \begin_inset space ~
31512 in the optional argument
31515 \begin_layout Description
31517 \begin_inset space ~
31530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31534 \begin_inset Newline newline
31538 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31545 in the optional argument
31548 \begin_layout Description
31550 \begin_inset space ~
31559 , empty optional argument
31562 \begin_layout Description
31565 headrulewidth set to 2
31566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31572 \begin_layout Standard
31573 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31574 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31590 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 pagestyle{headings}
31610 \begin_inset Note Note
31613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31614 switches back to page style with the default headings
31622 \begin_layout Section
31623 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31626 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31631 \begin_inset Index idx
31634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31641 \begin_inset Index idx
31644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31653 \begin_layout Standard
31655 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31656 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31657 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31660 \begin_layout Subsection
31664 \begin_layout Standard
31665 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31671 \begin_inset Index idx
31674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31676 -packages ! preview-latex
31681 (on some systems named simply
31686 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31688 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31694 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31696 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31704 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31705 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31706 -package are automatically
31707 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31711 \begin_layout Subsection
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31716 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31717 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31719 activate the option
31722 \begin_inset space ~
31729 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31735 \begin_inset space ~
31739 \begin_inset space ~
31742 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31749 \begin_inset space ~
31762 \begin_inset space ~
31767 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31770 \begin_layout Standard
31771 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31776 \begin_inset space ~
31784 \begin_inset space ~
31792 \begin_layout Standard
31793 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31794 and when you finish
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31807 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31808 generated by activating the option
31811 \begin_inset space ~
31817 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31825 \begin_layout Subsection
31826 Selected document parts
31829 \begin_layout Standard
31830 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31831 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31832 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31833 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31835 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31841 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31842 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31843 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31846 \begin_layout Standard
31847 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31854 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31866 is explained in section
31868 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31873 \begin_inset space ~
31883 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31884 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31885 the final rotated boxes,
31886 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31887 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31889 Here is the result:
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 \begin_inset Preview
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31904 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31910 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31920 height_special "totalheight"
31925 backgroundcolor "none"
31928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31953 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31959 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31981 \begin_layout Standard
31982 Previewing works also for colors.
31983 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32002 is explained in section
32009 \begin_inset space ~
32022 \begin_layout Standard
32023 \begin_inset Preview
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32048 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32053 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32072 \begin_layout Standard
32073 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 If \SpecialChar LyX
32081 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32082 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32083 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32084 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32085 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32086 the \SpecialChar TeX
32088 If \SpecialChar LyX
32089 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32090 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32092 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32093 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32094 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32097 \begin_layout Subsection
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32103 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32104 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32107 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32109 \begin_inset space ~
32114 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32116 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32118 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32119 's main window, then only this selection
32120 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32121 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32122 the source view window.
32127 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32128 ; but note that if you have
32129 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32131 not just the one which is open at the time.
32134 \begin_layout Section
32135 Advanced Find and Replace
32136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32138 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32143 \begin_inset Index idx
32146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32153 \begin_inset Index idx
32156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32165 \begin_layout Subsection
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32170 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32171 allows for searching of complex,
32172 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32174 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32175 The key-features are:
32178 \begin_layout Itemize
32179 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32180 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32181 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32185 \begin_layout Itemize
32186 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32187 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32188 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32189 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32192 \begin_layout Itemize
32193 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32194 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32195 outside of mathematics environments
32198 \begin_layout Itemize
32199 Search may be widened to a specific
32204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32208 \begin_inset space ~
32211 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32212 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32219 \begin_layout Itemize
32220 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32221 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32226 \begin_inset space ~
32229 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32232 \begin_layout Subsection
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32237 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32252 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32255 ) or the toolbar button
32258 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32264 Advanced Find and Replace
32269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32273 \begin_layout Standard
32279 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32283 \begin_inset space ~
32288 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32291 arg "paragraph-break"
32295 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32296 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32300 arg "paragraph-break"
32303 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32307 searches backwards.
32310 \begin_layout Standard
32314 \begin_inset space ~
32319 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32328 \begin_inset space ~
32333 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32337 Searching for mathematics
32340 \begin_layout Standard
32341 Mathematical formulas, such as
32342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32345 or something more complex like
32346 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32349 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32354 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32355 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32356 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32357 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32367 \begin_layout Standard
32368 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32369 This is done by switching to the
32373 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32378 This way, entering in the
32385 \begin_layout Itemize
32386 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32387 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32390 \begin_layout Itemize
32391 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32392 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32395 \begin_layout Itemize
32396 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32397 of it only within section headings.
32398 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32399 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32403 \begin_layout Itemize
32404 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32405 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32412 \begin_layout Standard
32413 The entries made in the
32417 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32420 \begin_inset space ~
32426 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32430 button or alternatively press
32433 arg "paragraph-break"
32440 while the cursor is in the
32443 \begin_inset space ~
32451 \begin_layout Standard
32452 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32454 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32458 \begin_layout Itemize
32459 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32460 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32468 with its typewriter version
32469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32483 \begin_layout Itemize
32484 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32490 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32502 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32509 (you may want to enable the
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32520 \begin_inset space ~
32525 options and disable the
32533 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32541 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32542 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32546 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32549 , or occurrences of
32550 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32554 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32560 \begin_layout Subsection
32564 \begin_layout Standard
32565 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32570 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32572 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32574 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32583 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32589 This is done with the context menu
32591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32592 Insert Regular Expression
32594 while the cursor is in the
32599 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32600 expression matching rules
32604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32605 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32612 \begin_inset space ~
32615 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32616 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32622 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32623 same text in the document.
32624 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32625 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32628 \begin_layout Enumerate
32629 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32634 editor the fraction
32635 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32639 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32642 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32643 fractions with the given denominator.
32646 \begin_layout Enumerate
32647 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32659 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32664 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32665 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32666 Also, by inserting a
32667 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32670 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32671 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32675 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32676 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32677 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32680 , and referring back to them through
32681 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32685 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32689 For example, try searching with the regexp
32690 \begin_inset Newline newline
32693 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32696 \begin_inset Newline newline
32699 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32702 \begin_layout Standard
32703 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32715 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32716 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32717 sub-expressions is absolute.
32719 \begin_inset space ~
32723 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32726 always refers to the first occurrence of
32727 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32730 in all entered regexps.
32738 \begin_layout Section
32740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32742 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32747 \begin_inset Index idx
32750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32759 \begin_layout Standard
32761 has a built-in spell checker.
32764 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32771 key or the toolbar button
32774 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32777 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32778 beginning of the currently selected text.
32779 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32780 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32781 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32782 scrolled so that it is visible.
32783 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32784 n, if any could be found.
32785 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32789 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32790 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32793 \begin_layout Standard
32794 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32801 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32802 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32804 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32805 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32808 \begin_inset space ~
32816 arg "dialog-show character"
32819 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32821 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32824 \begin_layout Standard
32825 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32826 can be downloaded from here:
32827 \begin_inset Newline newline
32831 \begin_inset Flex URL
32834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32836 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32842 \begin_inset Newline newline
32846 \begin_inset space ~
32849 files for each language.
32850 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32851 \begin_inset space ~
32854 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32855 's installation subfolder
32863 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32865 \begin_inset Newline newline
32868 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32869 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32870 but in most cases these are
32886 is the language code.
32889 \begin_layout Subsection
32893 \begin_layout Standard
32896 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32897 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32899 \begin_inset space ~
32902 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32905 you can set the following things:
32908 \begin_layout Description
32910 \begin_inset space ~
32913 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32914 should use for spell checking.
32915 Depending on your platform,
32929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32931 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32946 \begin_inset space ~
32949 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32952 \begin_layout Description
32954 \begin_inset space ~
32957 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32958 will always use the given language
32959 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32962 \begin_layout Description
32964 \begin_inset space ~
32967 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32973 \begin_inset space \space{}
32977 This should normally not be needed.
32980 \begin_layout Description
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32989 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33001 \begin_layout Description
33003 \begin_inset space ~
33006 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33007 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33008 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33009 appear in a context menu.
33010 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33014 \begin_layout Description
33016 \begin_inset space ~
33020 \begin_inset space ~
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33027 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33031 \begin_layout Section
33033 \begin_inset Index idx
33036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33045 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33054 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33055 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33067 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33076 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33078 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33079 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33080 which are available for many languages.
33083 \begin_layout Standard
33084 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33085 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33089 \begin_layout Subsection
33090 Setting up the thesaurus
33093 \begin_layout Standard
33102 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33106 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33111 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33117 \begin_inset space ~
33125 For instance, the US English files are named:
33128 \begin_layout Itemize
33132 \begin_layout Itemize
33136 \begin_layout Standard
33145 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33146 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33149 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33150 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33151 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33153 \begin_inset space ~
33158 ) to the path where they are installed.
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33163 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33164 ies, typical locations are
33170 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33174 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33178 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33181 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33187 LibreOffice-<Version>
33194 On the Mac, the default location is
33196 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33197 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33198 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33199 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33200 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33201 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33209 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33210 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33211 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33216 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33217 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33221 \begin_layout Itemize
33222 \begin_inset Flex URL
33225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33227 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33236 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33237 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33239 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33240 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33241 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33243 \begin_inset space ~
33248 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33250 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33251 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33256 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33258 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33261 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33267 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33270 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33271 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33279 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33280 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33281 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33283 \begin_inset space ~
33288 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33291 \begin_layout Subsection
33292 Using the thesaurus
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33296 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33298 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33301 or the toolbar button
33304 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33307 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33309 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33311 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33312 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33313 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33322 ), related terms (such as
33325 \begin_inset space ~
33334 ), compounds (such as
33337 \begin_inset space ~
33346 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33355 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33358 \begin_layout Standard
33359 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33360 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33366 the dictionary, such as the above
33370 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33375 \begin_inset space \space{}
33378 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33379 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33380 For example, looking up the word form
33384 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33389 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33394 \begin_inset space \space{}
33405 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33406 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33407 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33410 \begin_layout Section
33412 \begin_inset Index idx
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33422 \begin_inset Index idx
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33426 Document ! Change Tracking
33432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33434 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33442 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33443 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33444 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33445 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33452 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33454 \begin_inset space ~
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33477 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33478 You can change the color in
33480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33481 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33483 \begin_inset space ~
33487 \begin_inset space ~
33492 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33498 \begin_inset Index idx
33501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33502 Color ! Change tracking
33507 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33508 's status bar when the
33509 cursor is in changed text.
33510 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33513 arg "changes-merge"
33519 \begin_layout Standard
33520 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33522 \begin_inset Index idx
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33534 \begin_layout Standard
33535 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 \begin_inset Graphics
33543 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33551 \begin_layout Standard
33552 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33562 \begin_layout Standard
33563 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33570 \begin_inset Tabular
33571 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33572 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33573 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33574 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 arg "changes-track"
33592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33598 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33600 \begin_inset space ~
33603 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33605 \begin_inset space ~
33614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33623 arg "changes-output"
33631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33642 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33644 \begin_inset space ~
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33652 \begin_inset space ~
33661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33682 Jumps to the next change
33688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33697 arg "change-accept"
33705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33711 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33713 \begin_inset space ~
33716 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33718 \begin_inset space ~
33727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33736 arg "change-reject"
33744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33752 \begin_inset space ~
33755 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33757 \begin_inset space ~
33766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33775 arg "changes-merge"
33783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33791 \begin_inset space ~
33794 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 arg "all-changes-accept"
33822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33830 \begin_inset space ~
33833 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33839 \begin_inset space ~
33848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33857 arg "all-changes-reject"
33865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33876 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33878 \begin_inset space ~
33882 \begin_inset space ~
33891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33915 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33917 \begin_inset space ~
33926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33949 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33967 \begin_layout Standard
33968 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33974 \begin_layout Standard
33975 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33995 \begin_layout Standard
33996 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33997 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33998 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33999 the next change after the current cursor position.
34000 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34001 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34002 step to the next change.
34003 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34006 \begin_layout Standard
34007 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34008 to describe a change.
34011 \begin_layout Standard
34012 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34018 \begin_inset Index idx
34021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34023 -packages ! dvipost
34029 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34037 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34041 \begin_layout Section
34042 Comparison of Documents
34043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34045 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34050 \begin_inset Index idx
34053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34054 Comparison of documents
34062 \begin_layout Standard
34063 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34070 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34071 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34073 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34075 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34096 \begin_inset space ~
34100 \begin_inset space ~
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34108 \begin_inset space ~
34112 \begin_inset space ~
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34121 enables the change tracking option
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34137 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34140 \begin_layout Section
34141 International Support
34142 \begin_inset Index idx
34145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34146 International support
34154 \begin_layout Standard
34155 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34156 with any language you want.
34157 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34158 up \SpecialChar LyX
34160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34162 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34170 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34171 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34172 \begin_inset space ~
34176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34178 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34185 \begin_layout Subsection
34187 \begin_inset Index idx
34190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34197 \begin_inset Index idx
34200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34201 Document ! Settings
34207 \begin_inset Index idx
34210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34211 Document ! Language
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34223 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34226 dialog lets you set
34228 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34233 \begin_layout Standard
34238 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34243 \begin_inset space ~
34248 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34249 For details about the different encoding options see section
34250 \begin_inset space ~
34254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34256 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34263 \begin_layout Subsection
34264 Keyboard mapping configuration
34265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34267 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34274 \begin_layout Standard
34275 If you have for example a U.
34276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34279 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34280 can use an alternate keymap.
34281 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34287 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34288 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34291 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34292 \begin_inset space ~
34296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34298 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34303 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34304 which one you want to use.
34307 \begin_layout Standard
34308 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34309 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34310 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34314 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34315 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34316 one to support the characters you want.
34317 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34324 \begin_layout Chapter
34327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34329 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34338 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34339 topic inside the user's guide.
34342 \begin_layout Section
34344 \begin_inset Index idx
34347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34361 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34364 \begin_layout Subsection
34368 \begin_layout Standard
34369 Creates a new document.
34372 \begin_layout Subsection
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34377 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34378 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34379 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34382 \begin_layout Subsection
34386 \begin_layout Standard
34390 \begin_layout Subsection
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34396 Click there on a file to open it.
34399 \begin_layout Subsection
34403 \begin_layout Standard
34404 Closes the current document.
34407 \begin_layout Subsection
34411 \begin_layout Standard
34412 Closes all opened documents.
34415 \begin_layout Subsection
34419 \begin_layout Standard
34420 Saves the actual document.
34423 \begin_layout Subsection
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34431 \begin_layout Subsection
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34436 Saves all opened documents.
34439 \begin_layout Subsection
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34447 \begin_layout Subsection
34451 \begin_layout Standard
34452 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34453 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34454 It is described in the section
34456 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34461 Additional Features
34466 \begin_layout Subsection
34470 \begin_layout Standard
34471 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34472 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34474 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34475 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 When using the menu entry
34483 \begin_inset space ~
34488 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34492 \begin_inset space ~
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34500 \begin_inset space ~
34505 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34506 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34509 \begin_layout Subsection
34511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34513 name "subsec:Export"
34520 \begin_layout Standard
34521 You can export your document to various file formats.
34522 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34524 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34525 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34526 during its configuration.
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34530 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34532 \begin_inset space ~
34536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34538 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34545 \begin_layout Description
34551 \begin_inset space ~
34554 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34556 \begin_inset space ~
34559 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34560 \begin_inset Newline newline
34563 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34564 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34568 \begin_layout Description
34569 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34575 \begin_layout Description
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34580 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34586 \begin_layout Description
34587 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34588 's native DVI-format.
34589 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34590 files paths or file names in your document.
34592 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34599 \begin_layout Description
34600 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34601 in files paths or file names
34604 \begin_layout Description
34606 \begin_inset space ~
34613 ) DVI-format using the program
34615 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34618 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34630 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34638 \begin_layout Description
34640 \begin_inset space ~
34643 (cropped) the same as
34647 but with cropped page margins.
34650 \begin_layout Description
34652 \begin_inset space ~
34655 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34659 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34664 \begin_layout Description
34668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34676 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34684 \begin_layout Description
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34690 \begin_inset space ~
34693 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34697 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34705 \begin_layout Description
34709 \begin_inset space ~
34718 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34719 source that is compilable with the program
34721 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34725 \begin_layout Description
34729 \begin_inset space ~
34734 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34735 source, additionally all images used in the document
34736 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34740 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34743 \begin_layout Description
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34752 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34753 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34754 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34762 \begin_layout Description
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34775 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34776 source that is compilable with the program
34782 \begin_layout Description
34784 \begin_inset space ~
34788 \begin_inset space ~
34795 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34796 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34802 \begin_layout Description
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34807 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34808 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34814 \begin_inset space \space{}
34819 \begin_inset space ~
34823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34838 represent the version number)
34841 \begin_layout Description
34843 \begin_inset space ~
34847 \begin_inset space ~
34850 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34851 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34852 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34856 \begin_layout Description
34857 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34858 's internal XHTML engine
34861 \begin_layout Description
34862 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34867 \begin_layout Description
34868 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34870 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34873 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34877 \begin_layout Description
34879 \begin_inset space ~
34882 (cropped) the same as
34885 \begin_inset space ~
34890 but with cropped page margins
34893 \begin_layout Description
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34902 PDF-format using the program
34906 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34909 \begin_layout Description
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset space ~
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34930 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34935 \begin_inset space \space{}
34938 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34942 \begin_layout Description
34946 \begin_inset space ~
34951 PDF-format using the program
34953 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34956 , produces PDF-files directly
34959 \begin_layout Description
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34968 PDF-format using the program
34972 , produces PDF-files directly
34975 \begin_layout Description
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34984 PDF-format using the program
34988 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34991 \begin_layout Description
34995 \begin_inset space ~
35000 PDF-format using the program
35005 , produces PDF-files directly
35008 \begin_layout Description
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35020 \begin_layout Description
35024 \begin_inset space ~
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35033 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35034 and then exported as text using the program
35039 \begin_layout Description
35044 PostScript format using the program
35049 \begin_layout Description
35050 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35051 source and also code in the statistical programming
35065 it is possible to use
35069 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35073 \begin_layout Standard
35074 If one of the menu entries
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35090 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35092 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35094 \begin_inset space ~
35098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35100 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35105 \begin_inset Index idx
35108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35109 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35118 \begin_layout Subsection
35122 \begin_layout Standard
35123 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35124 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35127 \begin_inset space ~
35131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35133 reference "sec:Paths"
35138 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35147 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35148 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35149 's preferences as described in section
35150 \begin_inset space ~
35154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35156 reference "subsec:Converters"
35163 \begin_layout Subsection
35164 New and Close Window
35167 \begin_layout Standard
35168 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35172 \begin_layout Subsection
35176 \begin_layout Standard
35177 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35180 \begin_layout Section
35182 \begin_inset Index idx
35185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35194 \begin_layout Subsection
35198 \begin_layout Standard
35199 Described in section
35200 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35206 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35213 \begin_layout Subsection
35214 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35217 \begin_layout Standard
35218 Described in section
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35225 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35232 \begin_layout Subsection
35236 \begin_layout Standard
35237 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35238 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35241 \begin_layout Subsection
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35246 Selects the whole document.
35249 \begin_layout Subsection
35250 Find & Replace (Quick)
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35254 Described in section
35255 \begin_inset space ~
35259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35261 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35268 \begin_layout Subsection
35269 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35272 \begin_layout Standard
35273 Described in section
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35280 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35287 \begin_layout Subsection
35288 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35291 \begin_layout Standard
35292 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35296 \begin_layout Subsection
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35301 Described in section
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35308 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35315 \begin_layout Subsection
35317 \begin_inset Index idx
35320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35321 Paragraph ! Settings
35329 \begin_layout Standard
35330 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35331 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35335 \begin_layout Standard
35336 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35337 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35344 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35346 \begin_inset space ~
35354 \begin_layout Subsection
35358 \begin_layout Standard
35359 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35360 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35361 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35368 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35369 The properties of tables are described in section
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35376 reference "sec:Tables"
35380 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35381 \begin_inset space ~
35385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35387 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35394 \begin_layout Subsection
35395 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35399 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35401 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35408 reference "sec:Nesting"
35413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35415 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35422 \begin_layout Subsection
35425 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35428 \begin_layout Standard
35429 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35430 nts of the same type.
35432 \begin_inset space ~
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35438 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35442 for an explanation.
35445 \begin_layout Section
35447 \begin_inset Index idx
35450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35459 \begin_layout Standard
35460 At the bottom of the
35464 menu the opened documents are listed.
35467 \begin_layout Subsection
35468 Open/Close all Insets
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35472 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35475 \begin_layout Subsection
35476 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35480 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35483 \begin_layout Standard
35484 Math macros are described in the
35491 \begin_layout Subsection
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35496 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35503 reference "sec:Navigating"
35508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35510 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35517 \begin_layout Subsection
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35522 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35530 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35537 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 Opens a window showing console messages.
35543 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35548 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35549 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35550 is processing the document.
35553 \begin_layout Subsection
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35557 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35562 \begin_inset Index idx
35565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35574 \begin_layout Standard
35575 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35576 All toolbars and the
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35584 can be turned on and off.
35589 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35601 \begin_inset space ~
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35618 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35622 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35634 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35638 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35639 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35640 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35641 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35642 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35645 \begin_layout Standard
35647 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35648 \begin_inset space ~
35652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35654 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35661 \begin_layout Subsection
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35694 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35695 's main window vertically while
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35723 will split it horizontally.
35724 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35725 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35726 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35727 three or more documents at the same time.
35728 To close a split view, use the menu
35731 \begin_inset space ~
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_layout Subsection
35747 \begin_layout Standard
35748 Closes a split view.
35751 \begin_layout Subsection
35755 \begin_layout Standard
35756 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35757 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35758 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35759 's main window fullscreen.
35760 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35761 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35764 \begin_layout Section
35766 \begin_inset Index idx
35769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35778 \begin_layout Subsection
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35784 \begin_inset space ~
35788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35790 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35801 \begin_layout Subsection
35803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35805 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 Here you can insert the following characters:
35816 \begin_layout Description
35821 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35824 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35825 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35826 -packages you have installed.
35827 You can get a complete display by checking
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35836 \begin_inset Newline newline
35840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35848 Not all characters will be visible in the
35852 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35860 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35864 ) can display every character.
35872 \begin_layout Description
35873 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35877 \begin_layout Description
35879 \begin_inset space ~
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35886 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35893 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35900 \begin_layout Description
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35905 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35915 \begin_layout Description
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35920 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35924 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35930 \begin_layout Description
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35935 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35939 \begin_layout Description
35941 \begin_inset space ~
35944 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35948 \begin_layout Description
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35953 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35959 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35965 \begin_layout Description
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35970 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35974 \begin_layout Description
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset Index idx
35983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35990 \begin_inset Index idx
35993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35994 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35999 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36000 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36002 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36008 \begin_inset Index idx
36011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36019 \begin_inset Newline newline
36022 More information about this feature can be found in the
36028 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36034 \begin_layout Subsection
36038 \begin_layout Standard
36039 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36042 \begin_layout Description
36043 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36044 \begin_inset script superscript
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36055 \begin_layout Description
36056 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36057 \begin_inset script subscript
36059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36068 \begin_layout Description
36070 \begin_inset space ~
36073 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36074 \begin_inset space ~
36078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36080 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36087 \begin_layout Description
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36092 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36099 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36106 \begin_layout Description
36108 \begin_inset space ~
36111 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36118 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36125 \begin_layout Description
36127 \begin_inset space ~
36130 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36136 \begin_inset space \space{}
36139 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36140 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36149 To insert a fraction use the command
36154 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36158 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36167 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36174 \begin_layout Description
36176 \begin_inset space ~
36179 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36186 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36193 \begin_layout Description
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36198 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36205 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36212 \begin_layout Description
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36217 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36224 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36231 \begin_layout Description
36232 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36239 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36246 \begin_layout Description
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36251 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36252 \begin_inset space ~
36256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36258 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36265 \begin_layout Description
36267 \begin_inset space ~
36270 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36277 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36284 \begin_layout Description
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36293 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36300 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36307 \begin_layout Description
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36312 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36313 as described in section
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36320 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36327 \begin_layout Description
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36332 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36339 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36346 \begin_layout Description
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36351 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36352 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36360 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36367 \begin_layout Description
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36372 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36379 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36386 \begin_layout Description
36388 \begin_inset space ~
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36395 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36402 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36409 \begin_layout Subsection
36413 \begin_layout Standard
36414 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36439 are described in section
36440 \begin_inset space ~
36444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36446 reference "sec:toc"
36455 is described in section
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36462 reference "sec:Index"
36470 is described in section
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36477 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36483 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36486 is described in section
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36493 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36500 \begin_layout Subsection
36504 \begin_layout Standard
36505 To insert floats, as described in section
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36512 reference "sec:Floats"
36516 and in detail the chapter
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36531 \begin_layout Subsection
36535 \begin_layout Standard
36536 To insert notes, described in section
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36543 reference "sec:Notes"
36550 \begin_layout Subsection
36554 \begin_layout Standard
36555 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36557 Branches are described in section
36558 \begin_inset space ~
36562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36564 reference "sec:Branches"
36571 \begin_layout Subsection
36575 \begin_layout Standard
36576 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36577 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36579 An example is the document class
36580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36587 with three custom insets.
36590 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36594 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36600 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36603 \begin_layout Subsection
36605 \begin_inset Index idx
36608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36617 \begin_layout Standard
36618 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36620 For more information see chapter
36622 External Document Parts
36625 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_layout Subsection
36633 \begin_inset Index idx
36636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36645 \begin_layout Standard
36646 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36647 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36662 \begin_layout Subsection
36666 \begin_layout Standard
36671 dialog as described in section
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36678 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36685 \begin_layout Subsection
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36694 as described in section
36695 \begin_inset space ~
36699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36701 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36708 \begin_layout Subsection
36712 \begin_layout Standard
36717 as described in section
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36724 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36731 \begin_layout Subsection
36733 \begin_inset Index idx
36736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36743 \begin_inset Index idx
36746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36747 Longtables ! Caption
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36757 Floats are described in section
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36764 reference "sec:Floats"
36768 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36775 \begin_inset space ~
36783 \begin_layout Subsection
36787 \begin_layout Standard
36788 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36795 reference "sec:Index"
36802 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36808 \begin_inset space ~
36812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36814 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36821 \begin_layout Subsection
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36827 Tables are described in section
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "sec:Tables"
36838 and in detail in the chapter
36845 \begin_inset space ~
36853 \begin_layout Subsection
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36863 Graphics are described in section
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36870 reference "sec:Graphics"
36877 \begin_layout Subsection
36881 \begin_layout Standard
36882 Inserts a URL as described in section
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36889 reference "subsec:URLs"
36896 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_layout Standard
36901 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36908 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36915 \begin_layout Subsection
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36921 \begin_inset space ~
36925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36927 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36934 \begin_layout Subsection
36938 \begin_layout Standard
36939 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36940 \begin_inset space ~
36944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36946 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36953 \begin_layout Subsection
36957 \begin_layout Standard
36958 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36959 title or caption of a float.
36960 Inserts a short title as described in section
36961 \begin_inset space ~
36965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36967 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36974 \begin_layout Subsection
36979 \begin_layout Standard
36980 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36981 Code box as described in section
36982 \begin_inset space ~
36986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36988 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36995 \begin_layout Subsection
36997 \begin_inset Index idx
37000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37009 \begin_layout Standard
37010 Inserts a program listings box.
37011 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37013 Program Code Listings
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_layout Subsection
37030 \begin_layout Standard
37031 Inserts the actual date.
37032 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37036 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37052 \begin_layout Subsection
37056 \begin_layout Standard
37057 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37058 \begin_inset space ~
37062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37064 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37071 \begin_layout Section
37073 \begin_inset Index idx
37076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37085 \begin_layout Standard
37086 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37090 of the current document.
37091 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37094 \begin_layout Subsection
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37100 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37101 to jump, for example, between section
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37110 2.5 and use the submenu
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37134 \begin_inset space ~
37140 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37144 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37150 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37153 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37156 \begin_layout Standard
37157 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37166 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37169 \begin_inset space ~
37174 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37177 \begin_layout Subsection
37178 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37181 \begin_layout Standard
37182 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37186 \begin_layout Subsection
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37191 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37192 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37193 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset space ~
37209 \begin_layout Subsection
37213 \begin_layout Standard
37214 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37217 The \SpecialChar LyX
37218 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37228 \begin_inset space ~
37233 manual for a detailed description.
37236 \begin_layout Section
37238 \begin_inset Index idx
37241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37250 \begin_layout Subsection
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Change Tracking is described in section
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37262 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37269 \begin_layout Subsection
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37279 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37280 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37282 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37283 to the clipboard or update the view.
37284 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37288 \begin_layout Subsection
37289 Start Appendix Here
37292 \begin_layout Standard
37293 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37294 as described in section
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37301 reference "sec:Appendices"
37308 \begin_layout Subsection
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37316 \begin_layout Standard
37317 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37318 default output format for the document (menu
37320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37321 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37322 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37334 \begin_inset space ~
37338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37340 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37344 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37347 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37348 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37353 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37358 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37364 \begin_inset space ~
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37376 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37380 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37381 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37383 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37384 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37389 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37394 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37404 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37409 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37410 when it is first configured.
37411 The default output format is
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37422 \begin_layout Subsection
37423 View (Other Formats)
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37428 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37429 actual document with an external program.
37430 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37431 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37432 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37434 All possible formats are listed in section
37435 \begin_inset space ~
37439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37441 reference "subsec:Export"
37446 You should at least see the menu entry
37451 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37453 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37461 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37466 \begin_inset Index idx
37469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37470 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37479 \begin_layout Standard
37480 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37481 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37484 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37489 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37494 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37504 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37509 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37510 when it is first configured.
37513 \begin_layout Subsection
37515 \begin_inset space ~
37521 \begin_layout Standard
37522 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37523 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37526 \begin_layout Subsection
37527 Update (Other Formats)
37530 \begin_layout Standard
37531 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37532 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37535 \begin_layout Subsection
37536 View Master Document
37539 \begin_layout Standard
37540 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37561 manual for more information on this topic).
37562 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37563 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37576 generates the output of the whole book, while
37580 will just output the chapter alone.
37583 \begin_layout Standard
37584 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37585 in the document settings (menu
37587 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37589 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37595 \begin_inset space ~
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37607 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37611 ) or in the preferences (menu
37613 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37614 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37619 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37621 \begin_inset space ~
37624 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37642 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37649 \begin_layout Subsection
37650 Update Master Document
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37654 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37675 manual for more information on this topic).
37676 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37677 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37680 \begin_layout Standard
37681 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37682 in the document settings (menu
37684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37685 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37686 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37688 \begin_inset space ~
37692 \begin_inset space ~
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37704 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37708 ) or in the preferences (menu
37710 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37711 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37716 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37721 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37727 \begin_inset space ~
37733 \begin_inset space ~
37737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37739 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37746 \begin_layout Subsection
37748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37750 name "subsec:Compressed"
37757 \begin_layout Standard
37758 Un/compresses the current document.
37759 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37760 compression (see the
37762 Additional Features
37764 manual for details).
37767 \begin_layout Subsection
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37772 The document settings are described in appendix
37773 \begin_inset space ~
37777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37779 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37786 \begin_layout Section
37788 \begin_inset Index idx
37791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37800 \begin_layout Subsection
37804 \begin_layout Standard
37805 Spell checking is explained in section
37806 \begin_inset space ~
37810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37812 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37819 \begin_layout Subsection
37823 \begin_layout Standard
37824 The thesaurus is described in section
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37831 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37838 \begin_layout Subsection
37840 \begin_inset Index idx
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37850 \begin_inset Index idx
37853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37864 the highlighted document part.
37867 \begin_layout Subsection
37873 \begin_inset Index idx
37876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37877 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37886 \begin_layout Standard
37887 Generates with the help of the program
37889 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37892 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37893 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37894 This feature is not available on Windows.
37897 \begin_layout Subsection
37903 \begin_inset Index idx
37906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37916 \begin_layout Standard
37917 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37927 to see the full filename paths.
37930 \begin_layout Subsection
37932 \begin_inset Index idx
37935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 \begin_layout Standard
37945 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37946 files as described in section
37947 \begin_inset space ~
37951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37953 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37960 \begin_layout Subsection
37962 \begin_inset Index idx
37965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37978 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37996 \begin_inset Index idx
37999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38000 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38009 \begin_layout Standard
38010 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38011 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38012 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38013 -packages and programs it needs; see
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38021 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38028 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 \begin_layout Standard
38037 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38038 \begin_inset space ~
38042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38044 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38051 \begin_layout Section
38053 \begin_inset Index idx
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38066 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38067 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38069 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38077 \begin_inset space ~
38082 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38083 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38084 packages and classes found
38085 by \SpecialChar LyX
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38093 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38109 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38114 \begin_layout Section
38116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38118 name "sec:Toolbars"
38125 \begin_layout Standard
38126 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38133 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38141 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38142 This is described in the
38144 Additional Features
38149 \begin_layout Subsection
38151 \begin_inset Index idx
38154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38164 \begin_inset Graphics
38165 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38174 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 \begin_inset Note Note
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38202 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38207 manual for more information.
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38216 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38223 \begin_inset Tabular
38224 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38225 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38226 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38227 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38233 \begin_inset Graphics
38234 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38248 pull-down box for the environments
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38262 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38268 \begin_layout Standard
38270 \begin_inset Tabular
38271 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38272 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38273 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38274 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38374 arg "dialog-show print"
38382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38404 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38448 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38568 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38584 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38624 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38638 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38666 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38680 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38681 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38709 Emphasize text, function of the
38711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38713 \begin_inset space ~
38716 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38746 Set text to noun style, function of the
38748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38750 \begin_inset space ~
38753 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 arg "textstyle-apply"
38779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 Format text using the current settings in the
38785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38790 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38823 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38825 \begin_inset space ~
38834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38843 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38871 arg "tabular-insert"
38879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38901 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 Toggle outline window on/off,
38915 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38931 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38943 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38970 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38983 \begin_layout Subsection
38985 \begin_inset Index idx
38988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38997 \begin_layout Standard
38998 \begin_inset Graphics
38999 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39007 \begin_layout Standard
39008 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39014 \begin_layout Standard
39015 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39019 \begin_layout Standard
39020 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39026 \begin_layout Standard
39027 \begin_inset Tabular
39028 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39029 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39030 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39031 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 arg "layout Enumerate"
39076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39095 arg "layout Itemize"
39103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 arg "layout Description"
39157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 arg "depth-increment"
39184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39190 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39192 \begin_inset space ~
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 arg "depth-decrement"
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_inset space ~
39243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39252 arg "float-insert figure"
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39267 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39283 arg "float-insert table"
39291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39298 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39438 arg "nomencl-insert"
39446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39454 \begin_inset space ~
39463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39472 arg "footnote-insert"
39480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39502 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39551 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39571 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39680 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39696 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39722 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39731 arg "dialog-show character"
39739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39745 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39750 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39766 arg "layout-paragraph"
39774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39800 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39828 \begin_layout Subsection
39829 View/Update Toolbar
39830 \begin_inset Index idx
39833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39834 Toolbar ! View / Update
39842 \begin_layout Standard
39843 \begin_inset Graphics
39844 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39851 \begin_layout Standard
39852 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39858 \begin_layout Standard
39859 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39864 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39870 \begin_layout Standard
39871 \begin_inset Tabular
39872 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39873 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39874 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39875 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39915 arg "buffer-update"
39923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39945 arg "master-buffer-view"
39953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39979 arg "master-buffer-update"
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39995 \begin_inset space ~
39999 \begin_inset space ~
40008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40017 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40033 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 Synchronize with Output
40040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40064 View (Other Formats)
40070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 arg "update-others"
40085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40092 Update (Other Formats)
40105 \begin_layout Standard
40106 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40110 \begin_layout Subsection
40114 \begin_layout Standard
40115 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40122 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40126 , the table toolbar
40127 \begin_inset Index idx
40130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40144 manual and the math macro toolbar
40145 \begin_inset Index idx
40148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40161 \begin_layout Chapter
40162 The Document Settings
40163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40165 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40170 \begin_inset Index idx
40173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40174 Document ! Settings
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40191 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40192 is called with the menu
40194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40198 You can save your document settings as default with the
40200 Save as Document Defaults
40202 button in any dialog.
40203 This will create a template named
40207 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40208 when you create a new document without
40212 \begin_layout Standard
40217 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40218 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40221 \begin_layout Standard
40222 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40223 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40224 to find the one you are looking for.
40225 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40226 the submenus of the dialog.
40228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40232 \begin_inset space \space{}
40236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40243 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40244 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40245 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40248 \begin_layout Section
40252 \begin_layout Standard
40253 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40255 Document classes are described in section
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40262 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40270 \begin_layout Standard
40274 \begin_inset space ~
40279 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40284 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40285 as a layout for a document class.
40286 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40288 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40297 \begin_layout Standard
40298 Some classes use special class options by default.
40299 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40303 and you can decide to use them or not.
40304 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40305 recommended you leave them untouched.
40310 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40311 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40316 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40318 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40324 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40325 \begin_inset Newline newline
40330 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40333 \begin_inset Newline newline
40336 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40337 distribution, see section
40342 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40344 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40356 \begin_layout Standard
40361 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40362 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40363 in the background if the child document
40364 is opened without its master.
40365 This way child documents are always compilable.
40366 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40373 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40393 \begin_inset Index idx
40396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40398 -packages ! prettyref
40404 \begin_inset Index idx
40407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40409 -packages ! refstyle
40414 for cross-references, see section
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40421 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40428 \begin_layout Section
40432 \begin_layout Standard
40433 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40434 Please refer to the section
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40450 manual for details.
40453 \begin_layout Section
40457 \begin_layout Standard
40458 Modules are explained in section
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40465 reference "subsec:Modules"
40472 \begin_layout Section
40476 \begin_layout Standard
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40484 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40491 \begin_layout Section
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 The document font settings are described in section
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40503 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40510 \begin_layout Section
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40515 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40532 and whether it should be a
40535 \begin_inset space ~
40540 can also be specified here.
40543 \begin_layout Standard
40544 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40545 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40546 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40548 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40554 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40557 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40558 justifies the text on screen.
40559 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40563 \begin_layout Section
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 This dialog is described in sections
40569 \begin_inset space ~
40573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40575 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40589 \begin_layout Section
40593 \begin_layout Standard
40594 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40601 reference "subsec:Margins"
40608 \begin_layout Section
40610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40612 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40617 \begin_inset Index idx
40620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40621 Language ! Encoding
40629 \begin_layout Standard
40630 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40631 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40632 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40634 is always encoded in utf8).
40635 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40636 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40637 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40638 -command is not known for
40639 a particular character).
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40643 If you use the option
40648 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40649 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40650 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40652 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40653 exactly one encoding.
40654 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40657 \begin_layout Standard
40659 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40660 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40661 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40662 installation supports Unicode), choose
40663 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40664 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40665 is quite incomplete, so
40666 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40671 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40672 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40673 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40674 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40675 -commands is not used, because all
40676 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40677 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40678 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40679 , two new alternative engines
40680 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40682 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40684 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40715 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40720 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40724 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40727 \begin_layout Standard
40731 \begin_inset space ~
40736 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40737 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40747 The possible settings are:
40750 \begin_layout Description
40751 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40753 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40754 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40764 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40771 \begin_layout Description
40772 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40773 format you will use.
40774 In many cases this will be
40779 \begin_inset Index idx
40782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40790 If the newer package
40795 \begin_inset Index idx
40798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40800 -packages ! polyglossia
40805 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40806 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40807 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40809 this package will be used instead of
40816 \begin_layout Description
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40829 would be more appropriate.
40832 \begin_layout Description
40833 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40834 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40838 (for German texts), type in
40841 \begin_inset Newline newline
40846 usepackage{ngerman}
40849 \begin_layout Description
40850 None will not use a language package.
40851 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40854 \begin_layout Standard
40855 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40858 \begin_layout Description
40860 \begin_inset space ~
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40875 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40881 \begin_inset Index idx
40884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40886 -packages ! inputenc
40892 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40893 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40894 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40898 \begin_layout Description
40899 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40901 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40902 commands, which may result in a big
40903 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40904 -commands are needed.
40907 \begin_layout Description
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40916 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40919 \begin_layout Description
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40928 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40931 \begin_layout Description
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40936 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40939 \begin_layout Description
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40948 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40949 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40952 \begin_layout Description
40954 \begin_inset space ~
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40961 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40965 \begin_layout Description
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40974 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40975 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40978 \begin_layout Description
40980 \begin_inset space ~
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40991 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40998 \begin_layout Description
41000 \begin_inset space ~
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41011 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41012 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41015 \begin_layout Description
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41024 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41025 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41026 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41027 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_layout Description
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41047 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41048 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41049 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41051 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41062 \begin_layout Description
41064 \begin_inset space ~
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41071 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41074 \begin_layout Description
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41083 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41086 \begin_layout Description
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41092 \begin_inset space ~
41095 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41098 \begin_layout Description
41100 \begin_inset space ~
41103 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41106 \begin_layout Description
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41111 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41114 \begin_layout Description
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41123 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41126 \begin_layout Description
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_layout Description
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41147 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41150 \begin_layout Description
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41162 \begin_layout Description
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41171 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41177 \begin_inset Index idx
41180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 , when using this, set the document language to
41192 \begin_layout Description
41194 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41201 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41206 , when using this, set the document language to
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_layout Description
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41224 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41230 \begin_inset Index idx
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41235 -packages ! japanese
41240 , when using this, set the document language to
41245 \begin_layout Description
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41251 \begin_inset space ~
41254 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41259 , when using this, set the document language to
41264 \begin_layout Description
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41273 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41278 , when using this, set the document language to
41283 \begin_layout Description
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41288 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41291 \begin_layout Description
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41304 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41307 \begin_layout Description
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41320 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41321 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41322 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41325 \begin_layout Description
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_layout Description
41339 \begin_inset space ~
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41346 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41347 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41350 \begin_layout Description
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41359 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41365 \begin_inset Index idx
41368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41391 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41398 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41401 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41408 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41409 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41411 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41414 \begin_layout Description
41416 \begin_inset space ~
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41423 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41429 \begin_inset Index idx
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41439 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41442 \begin_layout Description
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41447 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41453 \begin_inset Index idx
41456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41458 -packages ! inputenc
41464 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41468 \begin_layout Description
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41481 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41488 \begin_layout Description
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41498 \begin_inset space ~
41501 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41502 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41503 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41507 \begin_layout Description
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41520 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41521 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41524 \begin_layout Section
41526 \begin_inset Index idx
41529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41536 \begin_inset Index idx
41539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41546 \begin_inset Index idx
41549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41550 Color ! Shaded boxes
41556 \begin_inset Index idx
41559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41568 \begin_layout Standard
41569 Here you can alter the font color for the
41573 (default: black), for
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41581 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41585 (default: white) and for
41588 \begin_inset space ~
41598 sets the color back to the default.
41601 \begin_layout Standard
41602 Clicking any button showing
41610 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41611 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41612 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41613 later more quickly.
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41617 Note, if you change the
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41625 font color and use the option
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41633 in the document settings under
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41641 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41648 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41655 \begin_layout Standard
41656 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41662 \begin_layout Standard
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41675 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41678 \begin_inset space ~
41681 Code after a forced page break:
41684 \begin_layout Itemize
41685 For the page color:
41686 \begin_inset Newline newline
41693 pagecolor{color name}
41696 \begin_layout Itemize
41697 For the text color:
41698 \begin_inset Newline newline
41708 \begin_layout Standard
41709 You are restricted to one of
41745 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41758 \begin_inset Newline newline
41761 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41762 names to refer to them:
41765 \begin_layout Itemize
41771 \begin_inset Newline newline
41776 page_backgroundcolor
41779 \begin_layout Itemize
41783 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset Newline newline
41797 \begin_layout Itemize
41801 \begin_inset space ~
41807 \begin_inset Newline newline
41815 \begin_layout Itemize
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset Newline newline
41833 \begin_layout Standard
41834 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41837 \begin_inset space ~
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41853 \begin_layout Section
41857 \begin_layout Standard
41858 Here you can adjust the
41862 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41866 as described in section
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41873 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41880 \begin_layout Section
41884 \begin_layout Standard
41885 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41891 \begin_inset Index idx
41894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41906 \begin_inset Index idx
41909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41911 -packages ! jurabib
41919 Sectioned bibliography
41921 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41927 \begin_inset Index idx
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 -packages ! bibtopic
41937 and you can select a
41941 for the generation of the bibliography.
41942 For a further description see section
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41949 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41956 \begin_layout Section
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41961 Here you can define the
41965 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41973 reference "sec:Index"
41980 \begin_layout Section
41984 \begin_layout Standard
41985 The PDF properties are explained in section
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41992 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41999 \begin_layout Section
42003 \begin_layout Standard
42004 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42005 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42011 \begin_inset Index idx
42014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42016 -packages ! amsmath
42026 \begin_inset Index idx
42029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42031 -packages ! amssymb
42041 \begin_inset Index idx
42044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 \begin_inset Index idx
42059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42071 \begin_inset Index idx
42074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42076 -packages ! mathdots
42086 \begin_inset Index idx
42089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42091 -packages ! mathtools
42101 \begin_inset Index idx
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42116 \begin_inset Index idx
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 -packages ! stackrel
42131 \begin_inset Index idx
42134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42136 -packages ! stmaryrd
42146 \begin_inset Index idx
42149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42151 -packages ! undertilde
42156 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42159 \begin_layout Description
42160 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42161 -errors in formulas,
42162 ensure that you have this enabled.
42165 \begin_layout Description
42166 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42167 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42168 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42172 \begin_layout Description
42173 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42176 \begin_inset space ~
42188 \begin_layout Description
42189 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42192 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_layout Description
42205 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42216 \begin_layout Description
42217 mathtools is used for the math commands
42253 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42260 \begin_layout Description
42261 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42263 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42272 \begin_layout Description
42273 stackrel is used for the math command
42290 \begin_layout Description
42291 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42294 \begin_layout Description
42295 undertilde is used for the math command
42303 Accents for one Character
42312 \begin_layout Section
42316 \begin_layout Standard
42317 The float placement options are described in the section
42320 \begin_inset space ~
42328 \begin_inset space ~
42336 \begin_layout Section
42340 \begin_layout Standard
42341 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42343 Program Code Listings
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42356 \begin_layout Section
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42369 set to be used and set the
42374 The itemize environment is described in section
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42381 reference "sec:Itemize"
42388 \begin_layout Standard
42389 You can furthermore specify a
42392 \begin_inset space ~
42397 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42398 command of the desired character.
42399 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42406 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42412 \begin_inset space \space{}
42416 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42426 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42427 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42430 \begin_layout Standard
42431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42440 -packages in the preamble (menu
42443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42453 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42457 usepackage{textcomp}
42460 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42464 usepackage{amssymb}
42474 \begin_layout Section
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42479 Branches are described in section
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42486 reference "sec:Branches"
42493 \begin_layout Section
42495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42497 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42508 \begin_layout Description
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42517 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42537 View Master Document
42538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42545 Update Master Document
42546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42553 menu or the toolbar.
42554 The default is set in
42556 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42557 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42559 \begin_inset space ~
42562 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42572 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42579 \begin_layout Description
42581 \begin_inset space ~
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42588 Output settings for the menu
42590 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42598 For a detailed description see section
42600 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42613 \begin_layout Description
42615 \begin_inset space ~
42619 \begin_inset space ~
42622 Options offers settings for the export format
42630 \begin_inset space ~
42635 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42639 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42648 settings are described in detail in section
42650 Math Output in XHTML
42655 \begin_inset space ~
42664 \begin_inset space ~
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42673 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42676 \begin_layout Section
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42685 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42687 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42689 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42691 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42695 \begin_layout Standard
42696 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42697 -syntax is given in section
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42704 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42711 \begin_layout Chapter
42717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42719 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42724 \begin_inset Index idx
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42736 \begin_layout Standard
42737 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42739 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42743 It has the following submenus.
42746 \begin_layout Section
42750 \begin_layout Subsection
42754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42755 User Interface File
42756 \begin_inset Index idx
42759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42760 Customization ! of toolbars
42766 \begin_inset Index idx
42769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 Customization ! of menus
42778 \begin_layout Standard
42779 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42780 interface (ui) file.
42781 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42789 \begin_layout Description
42794 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42797 \begin_layout Description
42804 the menu entries in popup context menus
42807 \begin_layout Description
42812 specifies the toolbar buttons
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42816 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42817 and edit the entries.
42820 \begin_layout Standard
42821 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42833 entries must be finished with an explicit
42858 and in the case of the
42859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42871 The syntax for the entries is:
42874 \begin_layout Standard
42875 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42906 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42909 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42910 -functions are listed in the menu
42912 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42914 \begin_inset space ~
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42930 For example, assuming you use the menu
42932 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42935 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42940 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42964 \begin_layout Standard
42966 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42981 to have the sixth bookmark.
42984 \begin_layout Standard
42988 \begin_inset space ~
42993 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42994 's toolbar buttons.
42995 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42996 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42999 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43010 \begin_layout Standard
43013 Enable tool tips in main work area
43015 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43023 \begin_layout Standard
43028 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43029 should display in the menu
43031 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43033 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_layout Subsection
43045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43049 \begin_layout Standard
43052 Restore window layouts and geometries
43055 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43056 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43063 Restore cursor positions
43065 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43069 \begin_layout Standard
43072 Load opened files from last session
43074 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43078 \begin_layout Standard
43081 Clear all session information
43083 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43084 sessions (cursor positions, names
43085 of last opened documents, etc.).
43088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43092 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43097 \begin_inset Index idx
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 \begin_layout Standard
43112 Backup original documents when saving
43114 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43115 it was saved the last time.
43116 It is stored in the
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43131 reference "sec:Paths"
43135 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43138 \begin_inset space ~
43144 The backup file has the file extension
43145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43162 Backup documents, every
43164 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43170 Save documents compressed by default
43172 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43173 \begin_inset space ~
43177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43179 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43184 This applies to newly created documents only.
43185 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43189 Windows & work area
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43195 Open documents in tabs
43197 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43201 \begin_layout Standard
43206 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43219 reference "sec:Paths"
43223 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43230 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43231 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43232 of \SpecialChar LyX
43234 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43235 instance is created for each file.
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43241 Single close-tab button
43243 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43253 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43254 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43266 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43267 before the change takes effect.
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43280 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43282 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43284 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43288 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43289 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43290 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43293 \begin_layout Subsection
43295 \begin_inset Index idx
43298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43307 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43314 \begin_layout Standard
43315 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 This section only deals with the fonts
43332 the \SpecialChar LyX
43334 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43338 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43349 \begin_layout Standard
43350 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43367 (depends on the system) as its
43370 \begin_inset space ~
43386 \begin_layout Standard
43387 You can change the font size with the
43394 \begin_layout Standard
43399 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43404 points have the size of 1
43405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43415 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43420 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43425 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43432 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43439 \begin_layout Standard
43442 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43444 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43445 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43446 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43447 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43448 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43450 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_layout Subsection
43459 \begin_inset Index idx
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43463 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43470 \begin_inset Index idx
43473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 \begin_layout Standard
43483 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43484 by choosing an item in the
43485 list and selecting the
43492 \begin_layout Standard
43493 By checking the option
43497 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43500 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43510 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43513 \begin_layout Subsection
43515 \begin_inset Index idx
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43527 \begin_layout Standard
43528 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43532 \begin_layout Standard
43537 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43538 This feature is described in section
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43545 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43552 \begin_layout Standard
43553 Checking the option
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43560 \begin_inset space ~
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43569 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43572 \begin_layout Section
43574 \begin_inset Index idx
43577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43586 \begin_layout Subsection
43590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43594 \begin_layout Standard
43597 Cursor follows scrollbar
43599 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43603 \begin_layout Standard
43604 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43605 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43606 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43612 Scroll below end of document
43614 is self-explanatory.
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43618 In \SpecialChar LyX
43619 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43626 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43628 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43629 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43632 \begin_layout Standard
43635 Sort environments alphabetically
43637 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43640 \begin_layout Standard
43643 Group environments by their category
43645 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43648 \begin_layout Standard
43653 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43668 \begin_layout Standard
43669 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43674 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43675 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43679 \begin_layout Subsection
43681 \begin_inset Index idx
43684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43691 \begin_inset Index idx
43694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43695 Settings ! Shortcuts
43703 \begin_layout Standard
43708 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43710 Several binding files are available, among them:
43713 \begin_layout Description
43714 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43717 \begin_layout Description
43718 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43730 \begin_layout Description
43731 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43742 \begin_layout Standard
43743 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43748 , and binding files for special languages.
43749 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43754 \begin_inset space \space{}
43758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43766 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43767 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43768 will try to use the appropriate binding
43772 \begin_layout Standard
43773 Some binding files, like
43777 , only have a limited scope.
43778 When looking at the end of the file
43782 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43785 \begin_layout Standard
43789 \begin_inset space ~
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43798 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43799 in the selected key binding file.
43802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43806 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43811 \begin_inset Index idx
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 Key Bindings ! Editing
43823 \begin_layout Standard
43824 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43825 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43826 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43827 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43830 Show key-bindings containing
43833 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43834 Insert there for example as keyword
43835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43842 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43843 functions that contain
43844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43852 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43853 All \SpecialChar LyX
43854 functions are also listed in the file
43859 that you will find in the
43866 \begin_layout Standard
43867 For example, to add the shortcut
43875 , select the function and press the
43880 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43881 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43884 \begin_layout Standard
43885 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43886 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43888 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43889 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43891 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43900 \begin_layout Standard
43901 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43903 The syntax of the entries is:
43906 \begin_layout Standard
43912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43931 \begin_layout Subsection
43933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43935 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43940 \begin_inset Index idx
43943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43950 \begin_inset Index idx
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43954 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43962 \begin_layout Standard
43963 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43964 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43965 provides keyboard maps.
43966 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43967 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43979 and select the keyboard map file named
43986 \begin_layout Standard
43995 keyboard map and, if you use the
43999 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44002 arg "keymap-primary"
44008 arg "keymap-secondary"
44011 respectively or toggle between them with
44014 arg "keymap-toggle"
44020 \begin_layout Standard
44021 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44029 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44038 \begin_layout Standard
44039 You can also specify the mouse
44041 Wheel scrolling speed
44044 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44048 \begin_layout Standard
44056 \begin_inset space ~
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44065 you can select a key for zooming.
44066 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44069 \begin_layout Subsection
44073 \begin_layout Standard
44074 Input completion is described in section
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44081 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44088 \begin_layout Section
44090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44097 \begin_inset Index idx
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 \begin_inset Index idx
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44119 \begin_layout Standard
44120 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44121 are normally determined during
44123 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44126 \begin_layout Description
44128 \begin_inset space ~
44131 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44132 's working directory.
44133 It is the default when you
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_layout Description
44154 \begin_inset space ~
44157 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44159 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_layout Description
44175 \begin_inset space ~
44178 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44184 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44188 \begin_inset Newline newline
44192 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44204 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44205 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44213 \begin_layout Description
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44219 \begin_inset Index idx
44222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44228 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44229 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44236 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44244 will be used to save the backups.
44245 \begin_inset Newline newline
44248 Backup files have the ending
44249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44259 \begin_layout Description
44261 \begin_inset space ~
44264 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44265 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44267 \begin_inset Newline newline
44274 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44280 You can edit this file with the program
44289 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44290 in its preferences under
44293 \begin_inset space ~
44299 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44304 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44306 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44307 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44313 and \SpecialChar LyX
44314 need to be running the same time.
44315 \begin_inset Newline newline
44318 The pipe is also used for the
44323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44329 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44334 \begin_inset Newline newline
44337 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44338 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44339 \begin_inset Newline newline
44355 \begin_layout Description
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44363 \begin_layout Description
44365 \begin_inset space ~
44368 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44369 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44370 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44373 \begin_layout Description
44375 \begin_inset space ~
44378 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44384 You only need to specify it if you are using
44388 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44390 For \SpecialChar LyX
44395 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44399 \begin_layout Description
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44404 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44405 When \SpecialChar LyX
44406 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44407 to find it on the system.
44408 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44410 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44419 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44420 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44423 \begin_layout Description
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44428 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44429 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44430 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44431 code or in the document
44433 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44435 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44436 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44437 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44438 scanned for the input files.
44439 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44440 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44442 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44443 compilation may fail for some documents.
44446 \begin_layout Section
44450 \begin_layout Standard
44451 Here you can insert your
44460 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44468 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44472 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44475 \begin_layout Section
44477 \begin_inset Index idx
44480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44481 Language ! Settings
44487 \begin_inset Index idx
44490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44491 Settings ! Language
44499 \begin_layout Subsection
44501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44503 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44510 \begin_layout Description
44512 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44519 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44521 You can find its actual translation status here:
44522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44524 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44531 \begin_layout Description
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44536 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44537 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44538 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44539 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44556 The most widespread language package is
44561 \begin_inset Index idx
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44571 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44573 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44574 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44575 come with the alternative
44581 \begin_inset Index idx
44584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44586 -packages ! polyglossia
44591 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44592 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44598 The available selections are described in section
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44605 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44612 \begin_layout Description
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44617 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44618 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44619 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44620 An example is the start command
44626 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44628 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44647 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44652 \begin_layout Description
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44662 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44663 command toggles the package on and off.
44666 \begin_layout Description
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44672 \begin_inset space ~
44675 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44679 \begin_layout Description
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44688 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44692 \begin_layout Description
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44698 \begin_inset space ~
44701 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44702 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44703 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44705 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44712 \begin_layout Description
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44717 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44719 When this option is not set, the
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44727 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44729 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_layout Description
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44754 When it is not set, the
44757 \begin_inset space ~
44762 is set to the end of the document.
44765 \begin_layout Description
44767 \begin_inset space ~
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44774 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44775 language will be underlined in blue.
44778 \begin_layout Description
44780 \begin_inset space ~
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44787 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44788 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44791 \begin_layout Description
44793 \begin_inset space ~
44796 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44797 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44798 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44799 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44802 \begin_layout Subsection
44806 \begin_layout Standard
44807 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44808 \begin_inset space ~
44812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44814 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44821 \begin_layout Section
44825 \begin_layout Subsection
44829 \begin_layout Description
44831 \begin_inset space ~
44835 \begin_inset space ~
44838 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44841 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44842 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44850 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44853 \begin_layout Description
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44859 \begin_inset Index idx
44862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44869 \begin_inset Index idx
44872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44873 Settings ! Date format
44878 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44879 \begin_inset Newline newline
44883 \begin_inset Flex URL
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44888 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44894 \begin_inset Newline newline
44897 For example the format
44898 \begin_inset Newline newline
44902 \begin_inset Newline newline
44905 prints the date as day/month/year.
44908 \begin_layout Description
44910 \begin_inset space ~
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44917 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44918 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44921 \begin_layout Description
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44926 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44928 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44930 \begin_inset space ~
44936 For a detailed description see section
44938 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44951 \begin_layout Subsection
44957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44959 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44964 \begin_inset Index idx
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44968 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44977 \begin_layout Description
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44987 \begin_inset space ~
44991 \begin_inset space ~
44994 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44999 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45020 are used for Cyrillic.
45021 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45034 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45036 sets up in the background.
45037 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45040 \begin_layout Description
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45049 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45054 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45058 \begin_layout Description
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45075 options They only have an effect when the program
45079 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45082 \begin_layout Standard
45083 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45084 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45085 manuals of the applications.
45088 \begin_layout Description
45090 \begin_inset space ~
45093 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45094 \begin_inset space ~
45098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45100 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45107 \begin_layout Description
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45112 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45119 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45126 \begin_layout Description
45128 \begin_inset space ~
45131 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45132 \begin_inset space ~
45136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45138 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45145 \begin_layout Description
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45154 command Command for the program
45156 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45159 that is described in the section
45161 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45166 Additional Features
45171 \begin_layout Standard
45172 There are additionally the following options:
45175 \begin_layout Description
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45181 \begin_inset space ~
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45194 \begin_inset space ~
45197 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45215 to separate folders.
45216 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45218 \begin_inset Index idx
45221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45228 \begin_inset Index idx
45231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45240 \begin_layout Description
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45246 \begin_inset space ~
45250 \begin_inset space ~
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45258 \begin_inset space ~
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45265 changes Removes all manually set
45271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45279 dialog when changing the document class.
45282 \begin_layout Section
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45288 \begin_inset Index idx
45291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 \begin_layout Subsection
45302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45304 name "subsec:Converters"
45309 \begin_inset Index idx
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 \begin_layout Standard
45322 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45323 from one format to another.
45324 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45325 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45332 \begin_inset space ~
45337 field and press the
45342 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45351 drop-down list, modify the
45355 field and press the
45362 \begin_layout Standard
45365 Converter File Cache
45371 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45373 Maximum Age (in days
45376 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45377 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45380 \begin_layout Standard
45381 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45382 definition, is described in the section
45393 \begin_layout Subsection
45395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45397 name "sec:File-Formats"
45402 \begin_inset Index idx
45405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45412 \begin_inset Index idx
45415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45424 \begin_layout Standard
45425 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45435 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45438 \begin_layout Standard
45439 You can also define the
45441 Default output format
45443 that is used when you use
45445 View, Update, View Master Document
45449 Update Master Document
45455 menu or the toolbar.
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45470 \begin_layout Standard
45471 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45473 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45474 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45475 This is done by specifying a
45480 More about this is described in the section
45491 \begin_layout Chapter
45492 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45494 \begin_inset Index idx
45497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45506 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45513 \begin_layout Standard
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45521 reference "tab:Units"
45525 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45526 and used in this documentation.
45529 \begin_layout Standard
45530 \begin_inset Float table
45536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45537 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45555 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 \begin_inset Tabular
45564 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45565 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 scaled point (65536
45775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45853 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45926 % of original image width
45931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46242 \begin_layout Chapter
46244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46246 name "chap:Credits"
46253 \begin_layout Standard
46254 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46255 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46258 \begin_layout Itemize
46261 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46264 \begin_layout Itemize
46270 \begin_layout Itemize
46276 \begin_layout Itemize
46282 \begin_layout Itemize
46288 \begin_layout Itemize
46294 \begin_layout Itemize
46300 \begin_layout Itemize
46306 \begin_layout Itemize
46309 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46312 \begin_layout Itemize
46318 \begin_layout Itemize
46324 \begin_layout Itemize
46330 \begin_layout Itemize
46336 \begin_layout Itemize
46342 \begin_layout Itemize
46348 \begin_layout Itemize
46354 \begin_layout Itemize
46360 \begin_layout Itemize
46361 The \SpecialChar LyX
46363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46372 \begin_layout Standard
46373 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46376 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46383 \begin_layout Bibliography
46384 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46385 LatexCommand bibitem
46391 The \SpecialChar LyX
46393 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46396 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46401 \begin_inset Newline newline
46405 \begin_inset Flex URL
46408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46418 \begin_layout Bibliography
46419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46420 LatexCommand bibitem
46421 key "latexcompanion"
46425 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46427 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46428 Companion Second Edition.
46431 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46434 \begin_layout Bibliography
46435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46436 LatexCommand bibitem
46441 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46444 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46448 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46451 \begin_layout Bibliography
46452 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46453 LatexCommand bibitem
46461 : A Document Preparation System.
46464 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46467 \begin_layout Bibliography
46468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46469 LatexCommand bibitem
46478 The \SpecialChar TeX
46482 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46485 \begin_layout Bibliography
46486 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46487 LatexCommand bibitem
46492 The \SpecialChar TeX
46494 \begin_inset Newline newline
46498 \begin_inset Flex URL
46501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46503 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46511 \begin_layout Bibliography
46512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46513 LatexCommand bibitem
46518 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46520 \begin_inset Newline newline
46524 \begin_inset Flex URL
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46537 \begin_layout Bibliography
46538 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46539 LatexCommand bibitem
46545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46547 name "Documentation"
46548 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46554 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46558 \begin_inset Newline newline
46562 \begin_inset Flex URL
46565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46567 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46575 \begin_layout Bibliography
46576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46577 LatexCommand bibitem
46583 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46585 name "Documentation"
46586 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46590 how to use the program
46592 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46596 \begin_inset Newline newline
46600 \begin_inset Flex URL
46603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46605 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46613 \begin_layout Bibliography
46614 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46615 LatexCommand bibitem
46621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46623 name "Documentation"
46624 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46633 \begin_inset Newline newline
46637 \begin_inset Flex URL
46640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46642 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46650 \begin_layout Bibliography
46651 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46652 LatexCommand bibitem
46653 key "makeindex-man"
46658 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46661 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46670 \begin_inset Newline newline
46674 \begin_inset Flex URL
46677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46679 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46687 \begin_layout Bibliography
46688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46689 LatexCommand bibitem
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46697 name "Documentation"
46698 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46707 \begin_inset Newline newline
46711 \begin_inset Flex URL
46714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46716 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46724 \begin_layout Bibliography
46725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46726 LatexCommand bibitem
46732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46734 name "Documentation"
46735 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46739 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46741 \begin_inset Newline newline
46745 \begin_inset Flex URL
46748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46750 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46758 \begin_layout Bibliography
46759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46760 LatexCommand bibitem
46766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46768 name "Documentation"
46769 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46773 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46779 \begin_inset Index idx
46782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 -packages ! caption
46790 \begin_inset Newline newline
46794 \begin_inset Flex URL
46797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46799 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46807 \begin_layout Bibliography
46808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46809 LatexCommand bibitem
46815 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46817 name "Documentation"
46818 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46822 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46828 \begin_inset Index idx
46831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46833 -packages ! enumitem
46839 \begin_inset Newline newline
46843 \begin_inset Flex URL
46846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46856 \begin_layout Bibliography
46857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46858 LatexCommand bibitem
46864 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46866 name "Documentation"
46867 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46871 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46877 \begin_inset Index idx
46880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46882 -packages ! fancyhdr
46888 \begin_inset Newline newline
46892 \begin_inset Flex URL
46895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46897 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46905 \begin_layout Bibliography
46906 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46907 LatexCommand bibitem
46913 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46915 name "Documentation"
46916 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46920 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46926 \begin_inset Index idx
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 -packages ! hyperref
46937 \begin_inset Newline newline
46941 \begin_inset Flex URL
46944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46946 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46954 \begin_layout Bibliography
46955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46956 LatexCommand bibitem
46962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46964 name "Documentation"
46965 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46969 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46975 \begin_inset Index idx
46978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46980 -packages ! nomencl
46986 \begin_inset Newline newline
46990 \begin_inset Flex URL
46993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46995 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47003 \begin_layout Bibliography
47004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47005 LatexCommand bibitem
47011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47013 name "Documentation"
47014 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47018 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47024 \begin_inset Index idx
47027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47029 -packages ! prettyref
47035 \begin_inset Newline newline
47039 \begin_inset Flex URL
47042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47044 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47052 \begin_layout Bibliography
47053 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47054 LatexCommand bibitem
47060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47062 name "Documentation"
47063 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47067 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47073 \begin_inset Index idx
47076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47078 -packages ! refstyle
47084 \begin_inset Newline newline
47088 \begin_inset Flex URL
47091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47093 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47101 \begin_layout Bibliography
47102 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47103 LatexCommand bibitem
47109 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47112 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47116 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47118 \begin_inset Newline newline
47122 \begin_inset Flex URL
47125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47127 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47135 \begin_layout Bibliography
47136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47137 LatexCommand bibitem
47143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47146 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47150 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47152 \begin_inset Newline newline
47156 \begin_inset Flex URL
47159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47161 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47169 \begin_layout Bibliography
47170 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47171 LatexCommand bibitem
47177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47180 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47184 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47185 for Cyrillic languages:
47186 \begin_inset Newline newline
47190 \begin_inset Flex URL
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47203 \begin_layout Bibliography
47204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47205 LatexCommand bibitem
47211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47214 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47218 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47220 \begin_inset Newline newline
47224 \begin_inset Flex URL
47227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47229 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47237 \begin_layout Bibliography
47238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47239 LatexCommand bibitem
47245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47248 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47252 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47254 \begin_inset Newline newline
47258 \begin_inset Flex URL
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47263 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47271 \begin_layout Bibliography
47272 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47273 LatexCommand bibitem
47279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47282 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47286 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47288 \begin_inset Newline newline
47292 \begin_inset Flex URL
47295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47297 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47305 \begin_layout Bibliography
47306 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47307 LatexCommand bibitem
47313 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47316 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47320 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47322 \begin_inset Newline newline
47326 \begin_inset Flex URL
47329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47331 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47339 \begin_layout Bibliography
47340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47341 LatexCommand bibitem
47347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47350 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47354 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47356 \begin_inset Newline newline
47360 \begin_inset Flex URL
47363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47365 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47373 \begin_layout Bibliography
47374 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47375 LatexCommand bibitem
47381 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47384 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47388 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47390 \begin_inset Newline newline
47394 \begin_inset Flex URL
47397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47399 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47407 \begin_layout Bibliography
47408 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47409 LatexCommand bibitem
47415 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47418 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47422 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47424 \begin_inset Newline newline
47428 \begin_inset Flex URL
47431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47433 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47441 \begin_layout Bibliography
47442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47443 LatexCommand bibitem
47449 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47452 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47456 about new features in
47462 \begin_inset Newline newline
47466 \begin_inset Flex URL
47469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47471 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47479 \begin_layout Standard
47480 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47514 \begin_inset Note Note
47517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47524 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47525 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47526 bibliography is the second one:
47534 \begin_layout Standard
47535 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47536 LatexCommand bibtex
47537 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47538 options "biblio/alphadin"
47545 \begin_layout Standard
47546 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47550 \begin_layout Standard
47551 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47552 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47559 LatexCommand printindex